Revit MEP

Metric Tutorial

25703-050000-5080A

2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. IES <Virtual Environment>, IES <VE> Copyright© 2007 by Integrated Environmental Solutions Limited Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Performing an Energy Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Resolving Routing Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 . 214 . 219 . 223 . 225 . 228

Contents | v

Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 228 . 234 . 239 . 244 . 245 . 250 . 255 . 260 . 264 . 270 . 275 . 282 . 282 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 289 . 296 . 306 . 312 . 317 . 323 . 330 . 336 . 336 . 340 . 364 . 403 . 409

Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Part 2

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 . 422 . 425 . 431 . 436 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 446 . 447 . 450 . 456 . 456 . 459 . 463 . 465 . 470 . 470 . 475 . 479 . 482 . 482

Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

vi | Contents

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 487 . 489 . 491 . 493 . 499 . 502 . 505 . 505 . 506 . 509 . 514 . 514 . 516 . 516 . 520 . 521 . 525 . 525 . 531 . 533 . 537 . 540 . 541 . 548 . 548 . 554 . 558 . 560 . 562 . 564 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 570 . 572 . 588 . 588 . 593 . 593 . 594 . 594 . 597 . 602 . 602 . 604 . 606 . 607 . 609 . 609 . 610 . 611

Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Contents | vii

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Part 3

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 . 634 . 637 . 643 . 645 . 647 . 647 . 649 . 650 . 651 . 656 . 656 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 668 . 668 . 670 . 674 . 675 . 677 . 677 . 680 . 682 . 686 . 686 . 687 . 689 . 692 . 692 . 693 . 694 . 694 . 697 . 698 . 698 . 700 . 701 . 704 . 704 . 709 . 709 . 711 . 713 . 716 . 716 . 718 . 721 . 721 . 725

Chapter 12 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Chapter 15 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . .

viii | Contents

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 727 . 730 . 732 . 739 . 739 . 746 . 750

Part 4

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 . 760 . 765 . 768 . 770 . 773 . 774 . 775 . 782 . 784 . 789 . 801 . 804 . 808 . 808 . 815 . 818 . 827 . 833 . 836 . 838 . 838 . 840 . 842 . 842 . 842 . 843 . 844 . 845 . 846 . 848 . 850 . 850 . 852 . 852 . 854 . 855 . 855 . 858 . 866 . 868 . 868 . 874

Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 880 . 881 . 884 . 884 . 890 . 894 . 897 . 900 . 900 . 902 . 905 . 914 . 914 . 915 . 919 . 919 . 923 . 928 . 933 . 935 . 935 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 945 . 945 . 946

Part 5

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 . 952 . 956 . 958 . 960 . 963 . 965 . 966 . 967 . 969 . 970 . 971 . 972

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

Part 6

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . . . . . . . . . . . 999 Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

x | Contents

Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 1003 . 1003 . 1004 . 1008 . 1011 . 1013 . 1015 . 1016 . 1018

Contents | xi

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you use the default template and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select Systems-Default_Metric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit MEP is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2008?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit MEP uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.
■ ■

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■

Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit MEP, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit MEP. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit MEP classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some

Understanding the Basics | 7

or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit MEP 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

Navigating the User Interface | 9 . This creates a new project based on the default template. the user interface is labeled. In addition. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. click .In the following illustration. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. By default. In the steps that follow.

Then. click Toolbar. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. and click. and View. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . While working in the drawing area. click the command name to start the command. place the cursor over the menu name. notice a door type is specified. TIP For example. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. To choose commands. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. On the left side of the Options Bar. Edit. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands.

Within the drawing area. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First. if you intend to add a door. 9 In the Type Selector. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. If you select the Door tool. For example. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. notice the list of walls that are available. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model.

Rendering tab: Commands for creating rendered 3D images. Modelling tab: All the commands to create model elements. containing buttons grouped by function.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: Includes commands for creating most basic building model components. 11 Click OK. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. immediately below the Type Selector. Drafting tab: Commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents. View tab: Commands for creating different views in the project. ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.

The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. click the tab. To access the commands within a tab. walls. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. elevations. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. families. Structural tab: Commands for adding structural components to your project. schedules. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. and group name. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. windows). and groups. families. 3D). family category (doors. reports. select Views (all). Construction tab: Includes commands for creating construction industry information. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . and rename views. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. sheets. Room and Area tab: Commands for making room and area schemes and plans.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: Commands for adding site components and producing site plans. In the Project Browser. delete. Massing tab: Commands for executing conceptual massing commands.

click Wall. The Status Bar 16 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. The browser is dockable. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location.■ ■ To open a view. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. click Cancel. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Do not click. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. double-click the name. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme.

In the Status Bar. The Status Bar also provides information. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. When you place the cursor over a component. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. In this case. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. click Modify. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view.In the bottom left corner of the window. Revit MEP 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2008 Help. 18 On the Design Bar. It highlights when the cursor is over it. 20 Press TAB. in conjunction with Tooltips. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. regarding selected components within a view." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. The elevation symbol consists of two parts.

Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. You can use this tri-pane. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. find a keyword on the Index tab. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. click . rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. If there is no Help button displayed. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. click Training Files. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window.rvt. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. For example. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP In this exercise. There are several tools that help you find information. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. Windows: From any window. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Click the Help button.

and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. 6 On the View toolbar. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). 7 Click Zoom To Fit. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 17 . this is referred to as a crossing selection.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. 8 Click in the drawing area. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option.

NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. and double-click 2nd Flr. Similar controls. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. called drag controls. Cnst. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. display along the ends. 14 Enter ZR. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. click . Without clicking in the dialog. on the View toolbar. roll the wheel to zoom the view. and select the wall. To modify or add snap increments. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. referred to as shape handles. click Zoom. press and hold CTRL. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Small blue dots. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. These are the drag controls. On a wheel mouse. If you do not have a wheel mouse. bottoms. When drawing or modifying a building model. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). and drag the cursor.

you want to move the table closer to the wall. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 19 . Some commands. to lengthen the wall. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. In this case. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. After selecting the element to be moved. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. and on the Edit toolbar. require two clicks to complete the command. such as Move and Copy. click (Move).15 Click and drag the left control. and click again to specify the ending position. click to specify the starting position. for example. moving the cursor to the left horizontally.

Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. select the second item in the list. All changes you make to a project are tracked.20 Click next to the lower wall. Move. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. 23 On the Undo menu. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. as shown. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Select the plant. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the drop-down menu next to . and drag it on top of the table. In this example. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

Some commands. such as the Lines command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click Lines. click Modify. on the Standard toolbar. click the Undo command. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 21 . 26 To end the command. Press ESC twice. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. On the Design Bar.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

autodesk. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. 23 . NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. After finishing each exercise. methodology. At the end of this tutorial. If the tutorial datasets are not present. As you create the mechanical system.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. go to http://www. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. By following the recommended workflow. This workflow begins with systems planning and design. you can choose to save your work. you design a mechanical system for an office building. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. However. This system consist of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. and concludes with documenting your design and exporting your design. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you will understand the process. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2008.Mechanical Systems 2 In this tutorial.

and click Save. Copy room tags 12 In the Project Browser. and click Select. Open the m Zones. you plan the system by first creating zones and then performing an energy analysis on the building space to determine heating and cooling requirements. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. select Shared parameter for Parameter Type. Zones allow you to better analyze and control the heating and cooling of the space. A new view called Copy of 2 . click New. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 10 Under Parameters. you create separate views in which to work with zones. enter Office for File name.Mech is created and becomes the active view (it is in boldface). under Categories. 8 In the Save As dialog. Create a new floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 5 After the Project Parameters dialog opens. The shared parameter file is saved as a text file. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click Add. When prompted to choose a shared parameter file. Create a shared project parameter 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. select Rooms. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog. In this lesson. and name the new parameter group Rooms. navigate to the folder of your choice. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 13 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. This allows you to easily identify the rooms when assigning zones. you create a shared project parameter. and click OK 3 times. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of 2 . click New. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. click Create.Mech Zones for Name. Later in the design process. and click OK. you copy the room tags from the level 2 architectural floor plan to the level 2 mechanical HVAC floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you create these views. Creating Zones In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Enter 2 . however. and then you use this parameter to assign each zone to a room. and click OK twice. under Groups. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. you create zones for the rooms on the first and second floors.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 2 In the Project Browser. and enter Zone for Name in the Parameter Properties dialog. you refer back to the views to verify zone information.Mech. First. right-click the view named 2 . Notice that the new Rooms group is selected for the parameter group. planning is critical to a successful design. and double-click Level 2.Planning Mechanical Systems Creating a mechanical system in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Mech. 24 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Yes. click the Training Files icon. Next.

TIP Notice that by selecting Paste Aligned. 18 Click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. In this case. and then select Room Tags. 15 In the Filter box.Mech Zones to make it the active view. double-click 2 . Creating Zones | 25 . only mechanical elements are selected because the view discipline has been specified as Mechanical. under Mechanical. click to filter the selected elements. All level 2 room tags are pasted into the view. you would have needed to manually align the selection.Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. All level 2 room tags are selected. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range are selected. If you had selected Paste from Clipboard (CTRL+V). all room tags are automatically aligned based on their original placement. 17 In the Project Browser. click Check None. 16 Press CTRL+C to copy the selection. and click OK. 14 On the Options Bar.

Mech Zones view. and select each additional room component. Level 2 Room Name Office 6 Office 7 Office 8 Office 33 Office 32 Conference Room 31 Office 29 Office 28. 21 Assign zones to the remaining Level 2 rooms according to the table below. and click (Properties). Then. press Ctrl. You have assigned zone 1 to Office 6. To clear a selection. select the first room component. Office 27 Office 26 Lounge 25 Open 2 Ladies’ Room 23 Men’s Room 22 Zone zone 1 zone 2 zone 3 zone 4 zone 5 zone 6 zone 7 zone 8 zone 9 zone 10 zone 11 zone 12 zone 13 26 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Assign zones to the level 2 rooms 19 In the 2 . Room Component Room Tag 20 In the Element Properties dialog. press SHIFT and select the room component to clear. enter zone 1 for Zone. use the Element Properties dialog to assign the zone. Note that the Office 6 room tag is not the room component but a room tag (annotation). TIP You can easily identify the room component by the diagonal lines that display after placing the cursor in the room. select the Office 6 room component. under Other. and click OK. TIP To assign the same zone to more than one room.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Save. Copy the room tags from the Level 1 architectural floor plan and paste them (using Paste Aligned) into the 1 . navigate to the folder of your choice. and created a shared project parameter.Assign zones to level 1 rooms 22 Using the methods that you just learned.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 25 In the Save As dialog. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. NOTE After finishing each exercise. you define a color scheme and assign it to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. Using this project parameter. enter Zones Training for File name. you assigned zones to the level 1 and level 2 rooms. you assign color scheme to these newly assigned zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system.Mech and name it 1 .Mech Zones view. click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the next exercise. Office 13 Office 12 Office 11 Office 10. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. You then copied room tags into the new views. you can choose to save your work.Mech Zones view. Office 16 Office 14. Office 9 Open 1 Ladies’ Room 20 Men’s Room 19 Zone zone 14 zone 15 zone 16 zone 17 zone 18 zone 19 zone 20 zone 21 zone 22 zone 23 zone 24 24 If you want to save your work. assign zones to the rooms according to the following table: Level 1 Room Name Office 3 Office 4. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 27 . do the following: ■ ■ Create a new mechanical HVAC view based on 1 . 23 In the 1 . Open the m Zones Color Scheme. you created new views by duplicating and renaming existing views. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using room schedules or accessing element properties. Office 5 Office 18 Office 17. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. However.Mech Zones.

click Duplicate to create a new color scheme legend type based on the existing one. Verify that By value is selected. right-click the Design Bar. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 11 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 8 Click OK twice. TIP You can also right-click. under Scheme Definition. click (Properties). 7 For Name. you modify the color scheme so that it is based on zones. ■ Colors are automatically assigned to the 24 zones that you previously defined. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar. and click Zoom to Fit. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and double-click 2 . enter HVAC. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. and click Drafting. and click OK.Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. select Zone. Next. click Color Scheme Legend. You applied the color scheme but it is based on room number. In the Type Selector. 28 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . select Number for Color Scheme. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Edit/New button. Modify the color scheme 12 Select the color scheme legend. and click OK. click Edit Color Scheme. and click OK after a message informs you that colors are not preserved when changing a parameter. 13 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. notice that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is now the current color scheme legend type.Mech Zones to make it the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 14 Click OK. and click to place the legend. do the following: ■ For Color. Apply the color scheme 9 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. 10 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan.

17 Position and insert the color scheme legend along the right side of the floor plan as you did in the 2 . The color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned. Next. double-click 1 . 18 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. select color RGB 255-255-128 (a light yellow color). select Number for Color Scheme. and verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected in the Type Selector. click Edit Color Scheme. NOTE Rooms that do not have zones assigned to them display as white. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.The modified color scheme displays. and click OK twice. Also note that elevations have been hidden in the view to enhance legend visibility. Notice that the color for zone 22 (Open 1) is similar to that of zone 15 (Offices 4 and 5) and needs to be changed for visual clarity. and click the associated color. 15 In the Project Browser. under Basic Colors. Because you specified a color scheme based on zones. click Color Scheme Legend. you create and modify the color scheme for level 1. This is because color schemes are view specific. so you will need to assign a color scheme to this view. TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box. The color scheme legend that you defined for level 2 is automatically applied. scroll down to Value 22 (zone 22).Mech Zones to make it the active view. Notice that the HVAC color scheme legend that you previously created is selected in the Type Selector. and click OK. each room displays the color that is associated with its zone. 22 In the Color dialog. click the color scheme legend.Mech Zones view. 20 On the Options Bar. 19 In the drawing area. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 29 . 21 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and do the following: ■ For Building Type. you perform an energy analysis on the building to evaluate energy loads.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. click File menu ➤ Save. you perform an energy analysis to estimate building energy usage. Performing an Energy Analysis In this exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. 2 On the Calculations tab of the Room and Area Settings dialog. Verify building information 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise.Zone 22 (Open 1) displays the new color. 30 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . verify that Office is selected. if you receive warnings indicating that the compute room volumes option is not checked and the output will be approximate. click Compute room volumes. Specify room and area settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Room and Area Settings. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Heating and Cooling Loads. enter Zones Color Scheme Training for File name. You also edited a color scheme for visual clarity. NOTE This setting must be configured to perform an accurate energy analysis. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise. 23 If you want to save your work. 24 In the Save As dialog. Open the m Energy Analysis. During an energy analysis. 4 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and click Mechanical. and click Save. right-click the Design Bar. you defined a new color scheme and applied it to the rooms in your building according to the zone that you previously assigned each room. verify that Compute room volumes is selected. and click OK.

You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). Rooms are then listed for the selected level. You have verified the building information. Each level that contains at least one room is listed under Level. For Place and Location. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the building information as project information. 7 Select Level 1 for Level. Next. you view various rooms in the building. spin the view to verify the rooms (energy surfaces) in the building. under Energy Analysis. 9 Click (Highlight). verify that VAV .■ For Building Construction. MA is selected. ■ ■ (Browser Building For Building Service (Default Room Service). click Edit for Energy Data. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. verify that Boston. Performing an Energy Analysis | 31 .You can also select all levels that contain at least one room to list all of the rooms in the building. View rooms 5 While pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling dialog. Next. verify that <Building> is selected. click the Rooms tab. 8 Select 16 Office. Then. 6 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Single Duct is selected. you need to view specific rooms. notice that the rooms in the building display.

or SHIFT-select a range of rooms. You can also press CTRL+A to select all rooms on a level. Remember that you may need to spin the view to see a selected room in the model. pan. you isolate a room. The View Selector is located at the bottom left corner of the preview pane. TIP You can select multiple rooms by pressing CTRL-selecting them. 13 Select Level 2 for Level. and then select 25 Lounge. 14 Click (Isolate). 12 On the View Selector. You can also view a room in relation to the other rooms or architecture in the entire building. click (Shading) to shade the room in blue. select a different room or multiple rooms on a level to highlight them. 32 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 10 With the Highlight tool active. Highlighting rooms allows you to verify that the room boundaries are as you defined them. the rooms display in blue. 11 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. NOTE Using the View Selector. If you select Shading. and zoom) the view in the preview pane as you can in the drawing window or you can use your mouse. you can select Wireframe or Shading for model graphics style. Also note that you click to dynamically modify (spin.The Office 16 highlights in red. Next.

and the Loads Report Summary displays. right-clicking. or import the IES model that has already been created. you can perform an energy analysis. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and room information to the IES <VE> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. Make your room information selections based on your specifications. After the energy analysis is completed. Performing an Energy Analysis | 33 . TIP If you select multiple rooms that have different room type. Next. 18 Verify that <Building> is selected for Room Type. room construction. select Office 3 on Level 1. Revit MEP performs the building calculations for heating and cooling in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. Isolating a room allows you to easily verify rooms that normally would be obstructed by other rooms and difficult to view normally. 16 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Perform an energy analysis and view the report 20 Click Calculate. select a different room or rooms on any level to isolate that them. The room information is located under Energy Analysis. You can also access the room information by selecting a room in the drawing area. and clicking Element Properties. 15 With the Isolate tool active. or room service values. Now that the building and room information has been verified. Verify room information 17 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the room information as room properties. 19 Using the methods that you learned. Room Construction. This indicates that the information in the building type named <Building> will be used for the Office 3 energy analysis. you verify room information.The Lounge on level 2 displays while all other rooms are hidden. verify the room information for the other rooms in the building. and Room Service. these values on the Room tab will be blank.

you will create supply air systems. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. under Graphics. Select Level 1 for Underlay. After system creation. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties). click File menu ➤ Save. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. you create new views. Create and modify a new ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. adding AC units. modify air terminal parameters. NOTE You must perform a new energy analysis each time you change building or room parameters. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. In this lesson. In this exercise. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. 34 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . sizing ductwork. and click Save. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you specified building and room information. You then performed an energy analysis on your building and viewed an energy analysis report. You can also select the 1 . including the Project Information. and validate your air system design. navigate to the folder of your choice. and Room Summary. As you place the air terminals. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the rooms. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Then. and viewed room to verify room boundaries.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Open the m Air Terminals. Weather Data. and click View Properties.21 Review the Loads Report Summary. In the next lesson. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. and double-click 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After completing the air systems lesson. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. click the Training Files icon. 23 In the Save As dialog. 22 If you want to save your work.

11 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. ■ ■ Under Primary Range. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. and press Tab. 6 Click OK twice. 10 Move your cursor to the upper left corner of the view. for the Level parameter. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range.200 Neck. click Air Terminal. for the Cut plane parameter. NOTE When entering a value. TIP When you click Modify. select M_Rectangular Diffuser . verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm.Round Connection : M_600x600 .5 In the View Range dialog. and enter 2615 mm for Offset. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. For example. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the supply air terminal as shown. enter the value. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . You can also press Esc to accomplish this. You specify 2615mm so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 2600mm) and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. enter 0 for Offset. for the Top parameter. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 12 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. Under View Depth. and enter 2615 for Offset. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. the command in progress terminates.Ceiling Mech is the active view. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. Placing Air Terminals | 35 .

and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. enter 150 L/s for Flow. click the center mid point of the ceiling grid to specify the move end point as shown. Thus. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. and click OK. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. and then click . This places the air terminal with an 2600mm offset from level 1. 17 In the drawing area. This is also the ceiling height for all rooms. the air terminal will be placed in the ceiling. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. TIP To use the Move tool. enter 2600 for Offset. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. click to specify the move start point.13 On the Options Bar. and after the mid point snap displays. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. 36 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . move the cursor in Office 3 located in the upper left corner of the floor plan.

19 On the Options Bar. Notice that the air terminal start point and end point align. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 3 air terminal selected.The air terminal is placed. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. then select Multiple. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. Placing Air Terminals | 37 . and then click the center mid point of the Office 4 and then of the Office 5 ceiling grids to specify copy end points.

Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. 22 In the Type Selector. 38 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . listening dimensions display to aid placement. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display mid point snaps only. and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. Notice that after you specify the copy start point. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. click Air Terminal.

and specify a 150 L/s airflow for each of them. 24 In the Type Selector. select M_Return Air Diffuser : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. Placing Air Terminals | 39 . make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 120 L/s and the offset to 2600mm. place 3 return air terminals in the open office (Open 1) to the left of the restrooms.Before you move the exhaust grill. 25 Using the same placement method and offset parameter (2600mm).

31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. right-click. Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 3 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. click Modify. and click OK. 40 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click on the Edit toolbar. Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout 30 Select the Office 3 air terminal. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. clear the UpFlowArrow check box. 29 In the Element Properties dialog.

do the following for level 2: ■ ■ Make 2 . Placing Air Terminals | 41 . 34 In the Save As dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. specify the same view parameters as 1 . and click Save.After you place the supply air terminals. Create the level 2 air terminal layout 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. and 120 L/s airflow for the exhaust diffusers. 33 If you want to save your work. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser.Ceiling Mech the active view. You will be using different views to design the systems. Specify the same 2600mm offset parameter for all air terminals as you did for level 1. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. navigate to the folder of your choice. ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. Specify 150 L/s airflow for the supply and return diffusers. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. In the Element Properties dialog. enter Air Terminals Training for File name.

you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. select Air Terminals. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule.In this exercise. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select Room. ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. More importantly. click the Training Files icon. you create the air systems. under Available fields.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. In this exercise. 7 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Number Room: Name Flow Room: Actual Supply Airflow 42 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. modified the air terminal parameters. Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. do the following: ■ Under Category. In the next exercise. Click OK. Open the m Air System Schedules. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. In the next exercise. 5 While pressing Ctrl. select Flow. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with rooms. click Schedule/Quantities. ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. and learned a method for precise placement. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Actual Supply Airflow Room: Calculated Supply Airflow Room: Name Room: Number 6 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. 4 Under Select available fields from. you create a schedule for the supply air system project.

Select Air Flow for Type. NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim including spaces. Select Blank line.■ Room: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field. Format the calculated value parameter 11 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Conditional Format. Select Between for Test. 9 In the Calculated Value dialog. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Check Supply Airflow is selected for Field. and Totals only. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Room: Number for Sort by. and Itemize every instance is selected. Verify that Formula is selected. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 43 . Click OK. Enter -35 L/s and 35 L/s for Value. Create a calculated value parameter 8 Click Calculated Value. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. ■ ■ Click the Background Color and select Green in the Color dialog. Click OK twice. 10 Click OK. select the field and click Remove. Organize the data 13 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Check Supply Airflow. in the Fields list. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. Enter Room: Actual Supply Airflow . Select Footer.Room: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. These rooms have a difference between the actual airflow and the calculated airflow within the range of -35 L/s and 35 L/s. Verify that Ascending is selected. 12 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. The Check Supply Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Check Supply Airflow for Name. The Check Supply Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine the rooms that meet the design requirements as they are green in the schedule. Select HVAC for Discipline.

This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. and press Tab. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. 15 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom region around Office 4 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. 16 Enter ZR. you are changing the air terminal connector size. 44 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. The green values in the Check Supply Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room meets the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 L/s. After you modify the airflow parameters. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. 19 Delete 150 L/s enter 165. 18 In the schedule. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. NOTE If a different project is also open. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. the selected air terminal displays in red. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. select the 150 L/s Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 4 air terminal. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. The Check Supply Airflow value displays in green indicating that it now complies with the Office 4 airflow design requirements. all Check Supply Airflow parameters display in green. and maximize the 1 . 20 Modify the other Flow parameters for the supply air terminals so that the airflow design requirements are met. 17 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).Mech to make it the active view.Mech floor plan view. NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. All other Check Supply Airflow values that do not meet these requirements are not green and need modification. Use the schedule as a design tool 14 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active.A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. 21 Close the schedule view. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. double-click 1 . Next.

If the System Browser does not respond. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 45 . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 23 In the Save As dialog. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. for the Top parameter. you create air systems. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. Under Primary Range. then press F9. click in the drawing area to make it active. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser.Mech view. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . enter Using Schedules Training for File name. 4 In the View Range dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. In this exercise. and click Save. In the next exercise. After creating the logical connection. Unlike logical connections. Explore the System Browser 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 1 . You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 7 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. navigate to the folder of your choice. click Edit for View Range. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and then create the logical connection between the system components. click File menu ➤ Save. enter an Offset value of 3000.Mech to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. under Extents.22 If you want to save your work. and click View Properties. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. click the Training Files icon. However. During this exercise. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. click System Browser. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. 5 Click OK twice. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. Open the m Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. This is the power of BIM. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation.

you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . 10 In the Type Selector. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. click Mechanical Equipment. For now. air terminals. after you placed the diffusers. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees.200mm Inlet. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 8 With the view active. Thus. each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. click to place the VAV box. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. enter ZR. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. and press Esc twice. and sketch a zoom region around Office 3 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. As you assign diffusers to systems. 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. If desired. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 46 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. if all system components are assigned. 11 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 3 door. So.

system specific tools display on the Options Bar. You created a system that includes the air terminal. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. click (Select Equipment for System). and cleared from the Options Bar. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 14 Select the Office 3 rectangular diffuser. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Next.Airflow. click (Create Supply Air System). you add the VAV to this system. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Click OK. IMPORTANT After you select a system component.Modify VAV box parameters 12 Right-click the VAV box. enter 165 L/s for AirFlow. and click Element Properties. Under Mechanical . and select the VAV box. Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 47 . TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. select an air terminal that you added to the system. 16 On the Options Bar. This VAV box services only Office 3 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. 15 On the Options Bar. enter 2900 for Offset. The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals).

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. Create the ductwork 17 With the new system selected. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. This display indicates that the new system is selected. 18 On the Options Bar. 48 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . select Main. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). and select the system. and select solution 2. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. They remain assign to their respective default systems. 20 On the Options Bar.The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. click Settings. place the cursor over the Office 3 air terminal and press Tab. and click Select to select the system. The organization is from upstream. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. 21 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. do the following: 19 ■ Verify that Network is select for Solution Type. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. ■ Click (Next Solution). Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. Notice that Solutions is selected. The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools.

For more information. For example. 24 Under System Type: Supply Air. Enter 2900 for Offset. click Finish Layout. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 49 . Enter 2900mm for Offset. 25 Click OK. refer to Help. The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. For example. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . select Medium for Detail Level. select Branch. as was the elbow itself. 26 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.22 Under System Type: Supply Air.Round for Flex Duct Type. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Verify that 1800 is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. 23 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Change the geometry display 27 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. thus it is not part of the system. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type.

The first time you press Tab. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Rerouting usually correct this issue. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. select Coarse detail level for single line. Check duct connectivity 28 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. and equipment. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. ■ 50 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Verify that Only is selected. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab.65 Pa/m. Under Constraints. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 30 On the Options Bar.TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. then you know that a disconnection exists. and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 31 In the Duct Sizing dialog. fittings. Size the duct 29 Place the cursor over the duct. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Click OK. On the View Control Bar. and enter . under Sizing Method. and click to select them. and press Tab twice. click Sizing. If the entire network does not highlight.

and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . double-click the second VAV box listed. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 4 and 5 (the offices immediately below Office 3). and click Element Properties.200mm Inlet. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 51 .The Office 3 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. 33 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click to place the VAV box. Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 32 Click in the drawing area. You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. click Mechanical Equipment. IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. 34 In the Type Selector. enter ZR. 36 In the left column of the System Browser. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. 35 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 4 door. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct.

This VAV airflow is the total airflow from the Office 4 and Office 5 air terminals. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. and click Select from the context menu. The component highlights in the drawing area. right-click. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. and number of elements in the active being edited. right-click the component in the left column. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. click Add To System. system equipment. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. 42 Place the cursor over the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. 41 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. and enter 350 L/s for AirFlow. NOTE After you select a system component.TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. This system includes the selected system component(s). 40 Click (Edit System). under Constraints. a new system is immediately created. enter 2900mm for Offset. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. If not. the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. 52 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click OK. 39 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 38 Select the Office 4 rectangular diffuser. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. 49 Place your cursor over the Office 4 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. 46 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 4. click Finish System. On the Options Bar. On the Options Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 53 . Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active. The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. click Select Equipment.43 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. the number of elements has increased to 2. 47 Select the VAV box. 45 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 44 Select the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. 48 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar.

Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 51 On the Options Bar. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. click Layout Path. and select solution 3. 52 On the Options Bar. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2.If you leave the mouse stationary. 53 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. 50 Click to select the system. 54 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The system displays in red.

Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 55 . 54 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. This was the reason for the warning message. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. click Finish Layout. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created.

it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. So. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Under Constraints. 59 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. ■ 56 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . If a warning occurs. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. 56 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 62 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. click Sizing. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. click Duct Fitting. and enter . Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. 61 On the Options Bar. Add an endcap 55 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 4. Size the duct 60 Place the cursor over the duct. under Sizing Method. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. 58 Move the cursor over the end of the main. Click OK. Verify that Only is selected. you can review it and take action if necessary. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. and after the end point snap displays. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared.65 Pa/m. 57 In the Type Selector.IMPORTANT When creating layouts. and click to select them. click to place the endcap. or modify the duct manually. You can either relocate the VAV box.

IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. The VAV box.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 57 . air terminals. However. Next. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 4 and 5 is sized using the Friction method at . and press Tab twice. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Check duct connectivity 63 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.

sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space). click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 66 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. 65 In the 1 .Mech view. click Mechanical Equipment. 58 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 67 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 64 Right-click in the drawing area. and click to place the VAV box. 69 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. 68 In the Type Selector. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . 70 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar.200mm Inlet.

Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. click . Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. select the 5 air terminals to the right of the VAV. This is the total amount of airflow for the 5 air terminals that will be connected. 72 In the Element Properties dialog. The selected diffusers highlight in red. click to select the system. 76 Select the VAV to add it to the system. The new supply air system displays in red. click . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 59 . and click OK. You will add this later. under Constraints. and press TAB once to highlight the system. Then. 74 On the Options Bar. You can refer to the Air Terminal Schedule or select each air terminal to verify this information. The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. enter 2900 for Offset. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. and enter 825 for AirFlow. and the red system display cleared. and on the Options Bar. click . 75 On the Options Bar. 73 While pressing CTRL.71 Select the VAV.

do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. 78 On the Options Bar. 60 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green.The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. click Modify. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. and select solution 3. select the left section of the main. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 77 With the system selected. 79 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Next. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. You have logically connected the air system components. ■ Click . 80 In the drawing area.

After you select the main. select each of the 2 branches and drag them to their new locations as shown. you need to modify the branch layout. The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. 82 Repeat this procedure and snap the right section of the main creating a straight main to the VAV. 81 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the main down until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 61 . notice that drag controls display. Next. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. 83 With Modify selected on the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.

84 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. A change has occurred in the air system design. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. click Finish Layout. the branch path is too close to the diffuser. Undo the layout. and reuse the Layout Path to modify the branch layout. and click on the Options Bar. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 85 Select the main duct. 86 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. 87 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. 62 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . mechanical equipment. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. NOTE If flex duct is created instead of duct fittings. The system components are now physically connected. The ductwork is created. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). click Add to System. and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier.

you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. select the transition. The new system component is now part of the same system. click Finish System. 89 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. 90 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. the Number of Elements increased to 6. Then. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 63 . 92 Right-click. and the other duct segment. select a system component that is already part of a system. 91 While pressing CTRL.Notice that on the Options Bar. and working from the end of the main. duct segment. Next. and click Delete on the context menu. elbow. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. 88 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. VAV. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. This verifies the added diffuser.

select the transition fitting.The rectangular to round duct transition fitting is too close to the main. 97 On the Options Bar. 94 Drag the connector (and flex duct) straight down toward the diffuser to shorten the flex duct length and provide sufficient space to create the duct. otherwise an error will occur when you attempt to size the duct. 95 Zoom out the view. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. 93 Zoom the view. 96 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. Undo and drag the top transition connector to relocate the fitting and flex duct. You need to widen the distance between the 2 elements. continue using the Layout Path tool. you can right-click the connector. However. 64 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . At this point. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. You will draw duct in the next exercise. then you are dragging the lower connector. NOTE If you are moving the transition fitting only. and locate the top connector. and click Draw Duct on the context menu to draw the duct.

click Duct Fitting. Due to the takeoff based duct type. Ignore the warning message. 102 Move the cursor over the end of the main. the main is open and it requires an endcap to close the duct. click to place the endcap. click Finish Layout.■ Click . 100 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and select solution 1 98 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The new ductwork is created. This caused the warning message to display. 101 In the Type Selector. and after the end point snap displays. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. Add an endcap 99 Zoom in on the open end of the main duct. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 65 . NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap.

The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity. and click Element Properties from the context menu. 107 Place the cursor over the main duct. 103 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. You need to change the airflow because you added an air terminal to the system. and press Tab twice. and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. and click to select them.Notice that the centerline snap also displays to aid in fitting placement. change the airflow to 990 L/s. Size the duct 105 Right-click the VAV box. 106 Under Mechanical . 66 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP Depending on your ductwork layout.Airflow. Check duct connectivity 104 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.

65 Pa/m. double-click 1 . and enter . Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. Reposition and rotate if necessary. 109 In the Duct Sizing dialog. For VAV airflow. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . specify the air terminal airflow. under Mechanical. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct.Mech floor plan to make it the active view. Click OK.The selection displays in red. click Sizing. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. ■ This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 67 . Next. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. Verify that Only is selected.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. under Sizing Method. 108 On the Options Bar. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned. Under Constraints. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems 110 In the Project Browser.

68 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at . You can either relocate the VAV box. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 3000mm and the Detail Level to Medium. The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. or reinsert duct fittings. Next. modify the layout. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. see the note below.■ Select and modify a Network layout path solution. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork.65 Pa/m and select Only. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing.Mech mechanical floor plan view. you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2. Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 112 Use the 2 . Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. Reposition and rotate if necessary. If you receive errors. Verify that all Other options are cleared. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . see the note below. So. Do not change the duct conversion settings. If you receive errors. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. modify the duct manually. 113 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space.

65 Pa/m and select Only. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. After creating each system. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. click File menu ➤ Save. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. If you receive errors. Do not change the duct conversion settings. In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. navigate to the folder of your choice. Size the duct using the Friction method at . it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. In the next exercise. see the note above. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. and validated the systems in the System Browser. Although you already checked duct connectivity. Verify that all Other options are cleared. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. checked duct connectivity. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. specify the air terminal airflow. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. 115 In the Save As dialog. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. and click Save. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. If you receive errors. sized the ductwork.■ For VAV airflow. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 69 . enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. 114 If you want to save your work. You also specified VAV airflow. see the note above.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Open the m Using Views for Duct Validation. and double-click 1 . you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area.Mech to make it the active view. After you add the section. Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. 1 In the Project Browser. click Section. and click Zoom to Fit. enter ZR. under Graphics. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 5 air terminal to set the end point. click the Training Files icon. and 5. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 3 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 3. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. and click Properties. and the second click specifies the section tail. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. The section relocates under HVAC. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 4. 70 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . right-click Section 1.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. The first click specifies the section head. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number.

You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 71 . 10 On the Design Bar. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 4 and 5. click Modify. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges.8 In the drawing area. The selected section displays in red. The section head displays in blue. click the section. 12 On the View Control Bar. select Medium for Detail Level.

A section box displays around the building model. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. 21 In the drawing area. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. Notice that in the 3D Mech view. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. and click View Properties. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. 18 On the View Control Bar.14 Continue validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. and click OK. select Section Box. click Modify. 72 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . under Extents. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Mech to make it the active view.

Scroll. and Spin buttons to verify that the Office 3. click (Dynamically Modify View). navigate to the folder of your choice. 24 On the View toolbar. click File menu ➤ Save. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. 26 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be.22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. and 5 duct geometry is as you expected. use the Zoom. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. 28 In the Save As dialog. In the next exercise. and click Save. 25 In the Dynamic View dialog. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. 4. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 73 . You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. 27 If you want to save your work. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position.

Verify that Angle is cleared. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts. 74 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Mech to make it the active view.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Enter ZR.Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room until a snap displays aligning to the furthermost left partition of the Ladies’ Room above. and click to specify the start point. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that 300 is selected for diameter (D:). you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. Open the m Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. and double-click 1 . do the following. Enter 2900 for Offset. select Round Duct : Taps. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. click Duct. you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. click the Training Files icon. 4 In the Type Selector.

Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 75 . and click to specify the end point. 9 Move the cursor straight down and draw the second duct segment 9800mm. and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. 10 Now. 8 Press Enter to specify the end point of the first duct segment.7 Move the cursor to the left and when the listening dimensions appear. move the cursor down and 45 degrees to the right. enter 2750 to specify a 2750mm length for the first duct segment. enter 11000. and after the listening dimensions appear.

and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. use the Move tool to move the horizontal duct segment (located over the Mechanical/Electrical) up until the duct clears the exterior wall. you connect VAV boxes to the primary. Then. enter 3000. it may not clear the wall. 11 Finally. 76 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 13 Enter ZR.NOTE The primary duct needs to clear the exterior wall located on the left. If the duct does not clear the wall. 12 Press Esc once to stop drawing the current duct. Notice that the Draw tool remains active. 14 Place the cursor over the Office 3 VAV box supply air connection. click to specify the start point. move the cursor to the right. press Tab. click Duct on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar to open it again. and after the listening dimensions appear. Depending on the location of the first duct start point. Next. and select the duct (duct displays in red). after the connector snap displays. If you happened to press Esc twice and closed the Draw tool. and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 3. place the cursor over the duct.

press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. 16 Draw the first duct segment 600mm to the right. 15 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. 17 Move the cursor down and draw a 2450mm vertical second duct segment. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. If you pause briefly. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. and click to specify the end point. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 77 . When drawing duct. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. and press Enter to specify the end point. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 200mm VAV primary connector diameter. TIP When drawing duct.

the duct run connecting the Office 3 VAV to the primary is complete. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 4. 19 With the Draw tool open. 78 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .18 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. After you click to specify the end point. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy.

27 Draw a duct segment that connects to the centerline of the primary. or width and height. and after the connector snap displays. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. Because the duct is complete after you connected it to the primary. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 79 . This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. click to specify the start point. 26 In the Type Selector. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. 25 Right-click. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. 23 Zoom in on the Office 18 VAV box located in the lower-middle of the level 1 floor plan. 22 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. However. TIP If you right-click a connector and click Draw Duct on the context menu. verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected. On the View Control Bar. the duct diameter.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. you should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. 24 Select the Office 18 VAV. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 20 Place the cursor over the Office 4 VAV box supply air connection. you only need to press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool. 21 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. Remember that you quickly locate a room by highlighting the room component and viewing the room tag information on a tooltip and on the Status Bar. and click Draw Duct from the context menu.

30 Using the draw duct methods that you learned.28 Press Esc. 31 The 5 secondary supply air system duct runs are now physically connected to the primary. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. zoom the view to the right of the primary. 80 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 29 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Check connectivity 32 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes.

This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 81 . This is because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. 35 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. you will do that in a later exercise. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. Do not connect the Office 11 VAV because a routing conflict exists. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. Finally. Check connectivity. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. 33 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D Mech views. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. Do not size the primary. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and Angle is cleared. On the Options Bar. Complete the level 1 primary duct 34 In the Project Browser. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. specify a 2900mm offset. You will size the primary in a later exercise.

and double-click 2 . You will size the primary in a later exercise.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. On the Options Bar. Draw the level 2 primary duct 36 In the Project Browser. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. ■ ■ ■ 82 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Check connectivity. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. and Angle is cleared. specify a 2900mm offset. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. 37 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. You will connect this VAV in a later exercise.Mech to make it the active view. Do not size the primary. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. Do not connect the Office 26 VAV because a routing conflict exists.

Open the m Resolving Routing Conflicts. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. 2 Zoom in on the VAV box outside Office 11 located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. While drawing duct. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. In the next exercise. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you encounter routing conflicts such as the placement of fittings that prevents a duct connection. 39 In the Save As dialog. click the Training Files icon. Resolving Routing Conflicts | 83 . you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. You can resolve these conflicts manually or automatically. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Resolving Routing Conflicts Often as you create ductwork. and click Save. Finally. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click File menu ➤ Save.Mech to make it the active view. 38 If you want to save your work. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. and notice that the duct run has an elbow that does not allow a connection from the VAV box to the primary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. you use the Routing Solutions tool to automatically resolve duct routing conflicts with the high pressure supply air primary duct by selecting from a series of routing solutions.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. navigate to the folder of your choice. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views. Resolve a routing conflict on level 1 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1.

The selected primary duct run displays in red. and click Finish.3 Place the cursor over the primary duct run. click Routing Solutions. and click to select the primary and its fittings. 5 Use the left and right arrow buttons on the Options Bar or to view the different routing solutions. press Tab once. However. 4 On the Options Bar. 84 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you will use the solutions to resolve the routing conflict. 6 Select Solution 1. Notice that 2 end control points display enabling you to modify the duct ends in any direction.

and press TAB twice. verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected. Resolving Routing Conflicts | 85 . and click to specify the end point. 11 Place the cursor over the primary.The 45 degree elbows are replaced by a 90 degree elbow. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. Next. 8 Right-click. 7 Select the VAV box. you check connectivity. 10 Draw the duct from the primary air connector to the centerline of the primary below. and click Draw Duct from the context menu. 9 In the Type Selector.

and click Save. 16 If you want to save your work. Before sizing the primary. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct.Mech to make it the active view. you size the high pressure supply air primary duct. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. select a routing solution to resolve the routing conflict that prevents the Office 26 VAV box from connecting to the primary. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. 14 Zoom in on the Office 26 VAV box located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. click the Training Files icon. you manually drew duct to connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. then connect the VAV to the primary. In this exercise. In the next exercise.All connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. In this exercise. the Routing Solutions tool allows you to modify a specific segment of duct. and double-click 2 . you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. 15 Using the process that you just learned. 17 In the Save As dialog. 86 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes but you have yet to sized the primary. You viewed various routing solutions and selected the best solution to resolve 2 routing conflicts. This determines the airflow direction. you used the Routing Solutions tool to resolve routing conflicts.Velocity. Both tools provide a series of solutions and the ability to modify those solutions. Considering that both ends of the primary are open. However. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Resolve a routing conflict on level 2 13 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT Unlike the Layout Path tool which allows you to create entire duct layouts. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. navigate to the folder of your choice. The routing solution and connection are shown below. Open the m Duct Sizing . click File menu ➤ Save. After resolving the conflicts. enter Resolving Routing Conflicts Training for File name.

IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Duct Fitting. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. and click Mechanical.Mech to make it the active view. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. and after the end point snap displays. and double-click 1 . 4 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located outside Office 18. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and click to select it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 87 . Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. click to place the endcap. right-click the Design Bar. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar.

Under Constraints. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. 9 On the Options Bar. under Sizing Method. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Click OK. and enter 12.5 m/s. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. click Sizing. ■ 88 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Verify that Only is selected.The selected primary displays in red. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.

11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. or reinsert duct fittings. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 89 . Next. You can either relocate the VAV box. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. and press TAB twice. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary.The sized left primary is shown below. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. So. modify the layout. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 17. 13 Using the process that you just learned. modify the duct manually. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect.

Size the level 2 primary duct run 15 In the Project Browser. As in level 1. The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. 90 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction.The sized right primary is shown below. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run.Mech to make it the active view. and double-click 2 . 14 Using the method you have learned. 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run.

and click Mechanical.Mech Duct Classes for Name. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. In this exercise. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. 2 In the Project Browser. you sized the primary duct for the building. right-click the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Notice that you use the same duct color scheme legend type that you created in a previous exercise called HVAC. and click Save. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 91 . duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 . Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. 3 In the Rename View dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. First. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. click File menu ➤ Save. right-click Copy of 1 . and click OK.Mech. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. Using the same color scheme legend type allows you to quickly assign consistent color scheme legends throughout your design. Open the m Duct Color Scheme. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. enter 1 . and click Rename. enter Duct Sizing . you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. 20 In the Save As dialog.Velocity Training for File name. In the next exercise. 5 In the Type Selector. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. right-click 1 Mech. and click to place the legend.19 If you want to save your work.Mech is created and becomes the active view. Like room color scheme. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Then.

select the duct color scheme legend that you placed. click Edit Color Scheme. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity for Color. click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. delete the existing text. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click in the second row. and click OK. you change the color scheme. Next. and on the Options Bar.5 m/s. 92 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and enter 7. and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. In the At Least column. TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box. ■ ■ ■ Click OK. In the Color column.8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and enter low velocity for the first row. and enter high velocity for the second row. click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box. In the Caption column. Select By range. verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme. In the Color column. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area.

enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice. verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. enter 2 . click File menu ➤ Save. 15 In the Type Selector. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below. Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser.Mech is created and becomes the active view. 19 In the Save As dialog. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them. and click OK. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Mech Duct Classes for Name.The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. 12 In the Project Browser. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. and click OK. and click Save. 18 If you want to save your work. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 93 . right-click 2 Mech. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. right-click Copy of 2 . and click to place the legend. Using the same color scheme allow you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.Mech. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog.

click the Training Files icon. The 1 . First. click Close to deactivate the Show tool. 94 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 5 In the Element(s) In View dialog. TIP If the System Browser is closed. you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method.Equal Friction. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3. In this exercise. Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method In 2 previous exercises. Every supply air system that you created is listed.In this exercise. and double-click 1 . such as a VAV box and diffusers. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text.Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. To accomplish this. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as Mechanical Supply Air 6. and click Show. 2 In the System Browser. and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system. 3 Right-click Supply Air. Open the m Duct Sizing . All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. If the System Browser does not respond. and click Expand All. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. expand the Mechanical systems folder. not ductwork (physical connections). Finally. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size. you split the duct main into multiple pieces. In the next exercise.Mech to make it the active view. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser. you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method. click in the drawing area to make it active. then press F9. Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser. you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment.

click (Split). move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. 8 Watch the listening dimensions. split the main to the left of the middle branch at 4300mm from the beginning of the main. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not selected. 9 With the Split tool open.Split the main 6 On the Tools toolbar. 7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 95 . Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main. and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box. 10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. and split the main 2400mm from the end of the main. TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split.

12 On the Options Bar. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it. transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. Click OK. Next. for Ducts. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. verify that M_Duct Size Tag is loaded. Clear Leader. The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at . Under Constraints.65 Pa/m. 96 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 16 In the Tags dialog.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. ignore this warning. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 15 On the Options Bar. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. and click to place each tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Sizing Method. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined. Click Tags. Notice that as the airflow decreases. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment. click Sizing. do the following: ■ ■ Select Equal Friction. and click Cancel. and enter . ■ IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. under Category.

You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement. select the tag and drag it to a new location. Using this tool. 20 If you want to save your work. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow. click Zoom in Region from the context menu.TIP To reposition a tag. navigate to the folder of your choice. pressure. and double-click 2 . Finally. you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. and click Save. and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. 1 In the Project Browser. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. In this exercise. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. In the next exercise. Inspecting Air Systems In this exercise. 2 Right-click in the view. enter Duct Sizing . you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments.Equal Friction Training for File name.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. First. 19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2. 21 In the Save As dialog. you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized. click the Training Files icon. Open the m Inspecting Air Systems. Inspecting Air Systems | 97 .Mech to make it the active view.

diffuser. 98 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 5 On the Options Bar. click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click . After the System Inspector opens. A tooltip also displays the system information. and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. IMPORTANT To select a system. select (Inspect). System tools display on the Options Bar. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system.You will inspect this system. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. and click Inspect from the context menu. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow. pressure. select any duct segment. duct fitting. click Inspect. 6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Right-click a system from the System Browser.

These are not logically connected to this system. click to temporarily place the inspection flag on segment. you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. also known as the critical path. Next. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment. Inspecting Air Systems | 99 . Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. 10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one.

3 Enter Roof Mech for Name. Placing Air Conditioning Units In this exercise. In this exercise. the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. For example. 16 If you want to save your work. right-click Copy of Roof. select Mechanical for Discipline. A new view called Copy of Roof is created and becomes the active view. and pressure information for various systems in the project. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you place 2 AC units. and click Save. Open the m Placing AC Units. and click View Properties. click File menu ➤ Save. Create a new roof plan view 1 In the Project Browser. airflow. click the Training Files icon. 17 In the Save As dialog. In a later exercise. you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Rename. you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction. You also compared system information across a system. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. under Graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar.13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. 4 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view. and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. 6 Click OK. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. The primary is physically but not logically connected. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units. In the next exercise. and click OK. 100 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . right-click Roof. 2 In the Project Browser.

25 Ton .This specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton. select M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 . Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. 11 Snap to the lower end point of the horizontal partition wall in the Men’s Room as shown. and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). Add the AC Unit that services level 2 7 In the Roof Mechanical view. 12 Click to place the AC unit. You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. 10 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room. click Mechanical Equipment. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. enter ZR. and then click Modify on the Design Bar. Placing Air Conditioning Units | 101 . Zoom in if necessary to locate the lower end point snap. 9 In the Type Selector.

18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. Create a new section view 13 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 19 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. 16 Move the cursor to the right. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). and click to specify the section start point. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). select HVAC for Sub Discipline. 102 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. click Section.Next. you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. under Graphics. and after the cursor is past the AC unit. right-click Section 2. 15 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 8 VAV box. and click OK. click to specify the section end point. 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the Project Browser.

21 On the Design Bar. you must relocate it. AC units are level-based components.20 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. 24 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle. Placing Air Conditioning Units | 103 . 23 On the View Control Bar. 25 Select the AC unit. click Modify. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 22 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface. click Medium for Detail Level. To place the AC unit on the roof surface. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. and click (Move) on the Edit toolbar.

Remember to relocate the view in the Project Browser as you did with the Section 2 view. use the Align tool (on the Tools toolbar) to align the left edge of the level 1 AC unit to the left edge of the level 2 AC unit. The AC unit placement is shown below. Next. Place the level 1 AC unit 28 Using the methods that you learned. Then snap the top edge of the AC unit to the upper mechanical room wall and click to place it. 104 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below. click to specify the move end point. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface. This specifies the AC unit offset level of 300mm which moves the AC unit to the roof surface. 27 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit.25 Ton . First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top.26 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit. and after the end point snap displays. click to specify the move start point. place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures: ■ Work in the Roof Mech view. and place a M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 . (300mm directly above the start point). ■ Create a new section view above the AC unit as shown below. Use the Move tool. (Remember to select the reference edge first). and move the top edge of the AC unit 500mm down. and adjust the depth view clip plane to capture the level 1 AC unit only.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 105 . 2 Select the section box. Modify the 3D Mech view 1 In the Project Browser.■ Using the new Section 3 view with Medium detail level.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Completing the Supply Air Systems In this exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. relocate the AC unit 300mm above the roof level to place the AC unit on the roof surface. enter Placing AC Units Training for File name. ■ 29 If you want to save your work. click the Training Files icon. 30 In the Save As dialog. you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. First. you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown. and click Save. and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof. Then. In this exercise. In the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click 3D Mech to make the view active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. Open the m Completing Supply Air Systems.

and while pressing the middle mouse button. if you do this. the active view is the only open window. and drag the mouse to spin the model.The entire building including the AC units display. you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D Mech views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. Tile the views 5 With the 3D Mech view active. Note that if this option is unavailable. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. TIP You can also press Shift-middle mouse button. drag the mouse to spin the model as shown. 3 On the View toolbar. click (Dynamically Modify View). 106 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. Next. If you like. 4 Use the Spin button on the Dynamic View dialog. Remember that.

If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. the connector snap displays. ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 107 . This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. you did not begin drawing duct before pressing Spacebar You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Selector. 7 Enter WT to tile both windows. 12 Click to specify the duct riser start point. Enter -750 for Offset. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Roof Mech view. place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. click Duct. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. 8 Zoom the view in both windows as shown. the active view is tiled to the left. TIP When drawing duct. TIP When tiling 2 views. under Mechanical. and press Tab. select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. do the following: ■ Enter 1700 for W: (width). 14 On the Options Bar. and 500 for H: (height). 13 Move the cursor up to begin drawing duct and press Spacebar to match the duct size and offset to the AC supply connection size and offset. You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view.6 In the Project Browser.

The -750mm offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system. 108 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 2900mm from level 2. enter 1050 and press Enter to specify the end point. 15 Move the cursor up. Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. 16 Click Modify on the Design Bar. and then the duct continues horizontally for 1050mm. Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 2900mm. connections are automatically created. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components. and after listing dimensions display. Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. 17 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. If the 2 are different.

You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display. 20 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views. and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 .Mech to make it the active view. 18 Close the Roof Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 109 . You now switch to the 2 . but for this exercise you only need to see the riser.Mech view. double-click 2 . Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 19 In the Project Browser.Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser.Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted.Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 . This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar. TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. Notice that only the duct riser displays. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view.

23 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 110 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). Verify that Auto connect is selected. 25 In the Type Selector. The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. 27 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser. click Duct. The selected items display in red.21 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment. and after the mid point snap displays. verify that 2900 is specified. For Offset. and while pressing CTRL. select 450. 26 On the Options Bar. click to specify the start point. select the horizontal primary segment. select the adjoining elbow. 22 In the 2 Mech view. select Round Duct : Taps.

29 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. 30 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view.28 Move the cursor over the primary. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 111 . and after the centerline snap displays. click to specify the end point. The left primary is connected to the AC unit.

112 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Next.Mech view. 32 In the 2 . pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment. You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. 31 Spin the 3D Mech view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection. 33 Select the right primary duct. and place the cursor over the end connector.

click (Create Similar). click and draw the primary to the left over the wall. and after the centerline snap displays. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. However. NOTE When drawing duct either by using Duct draw tool on the Design Bar. 37 Place the cursor over the end of the primary. This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create duct. . click to specify the duct segment end point.34 Drag the connector to right. then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. if you use the Create Similar tool. 36 On the Edit toolbar. and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. or by right-clicking a connector. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 113 . 35 Select the primary duct. and after the connector snap displays. you should always verify that the duct type is correct in the Type Selector.

38 Draw the primary down 1000mm. 39 Draw the primary to the edge of the AC duct riser. and click to specify the end point. 114 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click to specify the segment end point. 40 The primary duct is created and connected to the riser.

41 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Create Similar tool. 42 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 115 . you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice. You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. Check connectivity 43 In the 2 .Mech view. However.

Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays. click to add the endcap.The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. zoom in on the duct riser. click Duct Fitting. 47 Place your cursor over the top edge. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. Add endcaps 44 In the 2 . 45 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar. 46 In the Type Selector. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. 116 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Mech view.

click to add the endcap. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. 50 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 117 .. The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. Verify endcap placement 52 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement. 51 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. 49 In the Type Selector.48 With the Duct Fitting tool open.

57 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. 53 In the 3D Mech view. and then validate its geometry. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap.Mech view to make it active. 118 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. 56 With the 2 views tiled. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. Create the high pressure supply air system. click in the 2 . and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 55 Press Tab to check connectivity. 54 Using the 2 views. Next. verify the duct riser endcap.

58 On the Options Bar. (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the 61 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. 60 On the Options Bar. and click OK.Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 119 . click Check None. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. click selected VAV boxes to it. 62 Click the 3D Mech view title bar to make the window active. 59 In the Filter dialog. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . In this case. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of the current view are selected. and select the level 2 AC unit. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D Mech view. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. and then select Mechanical Equipment.Mech view range. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected.

68 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24.You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. expand Mechanical. Validate the primary supply air system 64 Press F9 to open the System Browser. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed 66 Expand M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. 63 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 24 system listing. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. or even without ductwork. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. Supply Air. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. 65 In the System Browser. all system components must be logically connected by a system. 67 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 24 to view the VAV boxes. In the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). 120 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . This is the system that you just created. However. and click Select.

71 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Click the supply connector. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. 70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Specify the offset to -4400mm. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. Next. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. Next. 76 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 1700mm width. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. click Inspect. duct fitting. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. 72 Click a blank space in the 2 . you inspect the system. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. 2900mm.The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. move the cursor down. and click Inspect. and a 500mm height. diffuser. 75 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar.Mech drawing area to make the view active. and enter 1050mm. ■ ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 121 . click Inspect. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. The System Inspector tool opens. 73 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. Inspect the primary supply air system 69 In the System Browser. 74 Make the 3D Mech view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. Complete the level 1 supply air system 77 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise.

In the 1 . and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct.Mech view. select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. open the 1 . ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 .Mech view (if open).This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. Watch for the centerline snap as shown. Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view. This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement.Mech view. and tile it to the left of the 3D Mech view. ■ 122 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

Use M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D Mech view. Instead of drawing duct. and remember to zoom the view. ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 123 . The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. and after the edge highlights.■ Connect the primary to the AC. ■ In the 1 . and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. Use Tab to check duct connectivity.Mech view. release the mouse button. ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser. select the left primary duct segment.

You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. In the next exercise. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. you need to validate them. In this exercise. and validated these logical connections. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. 124 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. and inspect the system with the System Inspector.■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. Using tiled windows. 79 In the Save As dialog. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. you check the systems in your project. click File menu ➤ Save. and quickly target those systems that need attention. In this exercise. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it. navigate to the folder of your choice. ■ 78 If you want to save your work. and click Save. and for duct sizing. The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. Validate the system using the System Browser.

Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. click Check Duct Systems. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. as a tutorial exercise. So. As you view the warnings. thus assigning the components to a system. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. Checking Air Systems | 125 . 5 Right-click Default Return Air. In the System Browser. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. click the Training Files icon. and for duct sizing. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. For example. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. After you assign the system components to a system. Open the m Checking Air Systems. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. However.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. Revit MEP lists the system components that are associated with each warning. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. the duct is now associated with that system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. Then. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid.

and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. 6 Using the same methods.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. navigate to the folder of your choice. 8 Right-click Supply Air. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. You have completed the supply air systems for the building.The red lines represent the default logical connection. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. In this exercise. Then. and click Select Press to view it and its assigned system components. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. and inspecting the piping system. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. 10 If you want to save your work. placing a circulator pump. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. click File menu ➤ Save. 9 Right-click a system. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. In the next lesson. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. and click Save. You now confirm the systems that you created. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. you create hydronic piping systems. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. otherwise click Close. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. 11 In the Save As dialog. In this lesson. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder. 126 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP If you have multiple views open. open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. Depending on your air systems design.

and under Visibility. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog. scroll down to the Extents category.Piping view selected in the Project Browser. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the view Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. Under View Depth. Open the m Creating Piping Views. enter 2 . The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. 7 Click OK.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After completing the air systems lesson.Mech. This hides the grid lines to make it easier to place the fin-tube radiators. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. and click Edit for View Range. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Next. click the Training Files icon. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. and click OK. a boiler. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. and the systems to logically connect the system components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Creating Piping Views | 127 .IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. For Bottom. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. A new view called Copy of 2 .Mech is created and becomes the active view. pipes. clear Grids. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and enter -3500 for Offset. Enter 950 for Cut plane Offset. right-click Copy of 2 . Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . 9 In the View Range dialog. you create new views in which to design the piping system. click properties. you change the view range. and enter 950mm for Offset. right-click 2 Mech. and enter -3500mm for Offset. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. click the Annotation Categories tab. First.Piping for Name. circulator pump. for Level. and click Rename. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.

You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. 13 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. you do not need to type measurement symbols. and verify that equals is selected. In this lesson. On the Filters tab. select Mechanical Equipment. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. 128 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. However. 15 In the Filters dialog. you can add and activate filters. and press Tab.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems.Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. do the following: ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. however. 11 You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. under Filters. The 2 . you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. So. 10 Click OK twice. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. 18 Under Filter Rules. Considering this. they will not filter all system elements needed. 17 Under Categories. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. click 16 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. click in the drawing area to make the view active. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. click the Filters tab. and enter VG. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings.Piping view. the system filters are not used. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. and click OK. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. Create and define filters 12 In the 2 . For example. 14 Click Edit/New.NOTE When entering a value. just enter the value. (New). you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm. Also notice that 2 . it will be best to create filters.

click Air Terminals. 25 In the Type Selector. under Identity Data. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. 26 On the Options Bar. enter Air Terminal for Description. 29 Click Apply. you create a description as the common filter criteria. . You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. This adds a description for all Exhaust Air Grill air terminals of the type M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. system type. return. and click OK twice. otherwise the filter will not work. To do this. 21 Under Categories. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. 23 Enter Air Terminal for the description. or even a description that you define. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. 19 In the Filters dialog. and click OK. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Piping Views | 129 . However. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). So. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. This is the same rule for using formulae. Verify that none is selected for And. and verify that equals is selected. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. Click Apply. click Edit / New. Depending on the filter criteria.■ ■ ■ Select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV for the family name. Next. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. under Filters. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you must spell both verbatim. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. click (Properties). you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. Next. type name. you need a define common filter criteria. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). click 20 Enter Air Terminals for Name. you may want to select each component type separately. such as family name. 22 Under Filter Rules. click Air Terminal. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. select Description for Filter by.

you add a description for the supply air diffusers. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. 130 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. 32 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the return air diffusers. 31 Under Identity Data. Category: Ducts. verify that equals is selected. click Edit/New. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. 38 Using the methods that you just learned. By selecting each air terminal type separately.Duct Fittings. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. select M_Rectangular Diffuser . return. ■ ■ Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. So. And: Type Name. Because you already entered the description.Piping view to make it active. then the type parameters will not display. verify that equals is selected. 37 On the Filters tab. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. For Type. verify that equals is selected. you continue to create and define the filters. create the following new filters according to the specifications. This is because the selected supply. you need a common filter criteria. select M_600x600 .Next.Round. verify that equals is selected. 39 Click OK. you can select it. Next. And: Type Name. you specify a family and a type name. click the Filters tab. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. Filter by: Family Name. Category: Flex Ducts. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. 36 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. 34 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. verify that equals is selected. you need to define the filter again. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. Filter by: System Type. Category: Duct Fittings. and select Air Terminal. Filter by: Family Name. you will not see the Description type parameter. Round Ducts. Remember. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. To filter multiple duct fitting types. Next. click in the Value column for Description. and click Apply.200 Neck. 35 Click in the 2 . verify that equals is selected. So. ■ Flex Ducts . you filter duct fittings by system type. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. Filter by: Family Name. if differences exist in the selected elements. and enter VG. verify that equals is selected. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. Remember to click Apply. and select Round Duct for the family name. Category: Ducts. ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter.Round Connection. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . Filter by: Family Name. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. and enter Supply Air for system type name. Category: Ducts. 33 Click OK twice. If you did not click Apply.

right-click Copy of 1 . do the following: ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. and click OK. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. A new view called Copy of 1 . right-click 1 Mech. Next. and click View Properties. 47 Right-click in the drawing area. under Graphics. All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You now define the view properties. Next.Piping for Name. you activate the filters. 42 Under Visibility. click Add. you add and activate the filters. Creating Piping Views | 131 . Add and activate filters 40 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. 43 Click OK.You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. select all of the filters that you created. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. 46 Enter 1 . You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. 41 In the Add Filters dialog. Create the level 1 piping view 44 In the Project Browser. You used this duct to create the duct riser. Next. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler.Mech is created and becomes the active view. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. 45 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. 48 In the Element Properties dialog.Mech. This is because you have not added them. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. and click OK. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer.

ducts. you will want to validate the geometry. 53 Click OK twice. If you turn off ducts visibility. The 1 . 58 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. You do not need to use filters to place the boiler. 49 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and click Edit for View Range. clear Grids. and under Visibility. such as halftone architecture. Create the 3D Piping view 54 In the Project Browser.Piping view. 52 In the View Range dialog. As you create the pipe runs. scroll down to the Extents category. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. and click View Properties. 132 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 56 Enter 3D Piping for Name. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 3000 is specified for Top Offset. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and click Rename. under Primary Range. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level. 57 Right-click in the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Piping view displays the new view settings. right-click 3D Mech.■ ■ Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. The 3000mm top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except for the boiler pipe connection). 55 In the Project Browser. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Unlike the 2 . you change the view range. you will be unable to view the duct riser. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. 59 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. and click OK. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. and to create the level 1 piping system. click the Filters tab. Next. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. under Graphics. 50 Click OK. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. 63 Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. under Extents. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. 65 Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. You also created filters to display certain system components. select M_Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : M_25 NPT. Open the m Placing Radiators and Boiler.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. In the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Piping. 66 If you want to save your work. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 133 . you place the radiators and a boiler. 62 Under Visibility. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click Mechanical Equipment.60 On the Filters tab. click Add. clear Section Box to turn it off. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. and click Save. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click the Design Bar.Piping to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. You used this duct to create the duct riser. and double-click 2 . you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 67 In the Save As dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. select all of the filters that you created. 61 In the Add Filters dialog.

7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown.5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. 134 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. except for the windows on the radius wall. 6 Zoom in on Office 6 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown. and notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display. 8 Click to place the radiator.

25 L/s for all fin-tube radiators in the building. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. double-click 1 . and click Select All Instances.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. and click OK. for Flow. click . If the same type of component exists on another level. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 0.25 for Flow. Next. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. you modify the radiator flow rate. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. right-click a radiator. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. 14 Enter . then these are different across the selected objects. under Mechanical Loads. Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that 1. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 135 . If parameters are blank. Next. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. If so.Piping to make this the active view. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. 12 On the Options Bar. drag the section tail. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. you place the boiler. All level 2 radiators display in red. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool.25 L/s is specified for all of the selected radiators. and you do not want to include it.

Notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display after you place the boiler. and select M_Boiler : M_Standard from the Type Selector. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to place the boiler 1200mm from the right vertical wall and 400mm from the horizontal wall in Open 1 as shown. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser. right-click the boiler. under Type Parameters. 20 In the drawing area. You can filter the air terminals to make it easier to see the dimensions.50 L/s is set for Max Flow.16 Enter ZR. verify that 14. 136 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Mechanical Equipment. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. and click Element Properties. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. Next. you verify the boiler flow rate. watch the listening dimensions.

It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. click in the drawing area to make it active. you create the supply and return piping systems. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. 23 If you want to save your work. After creating the logical connection. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and then create the logical connection between these system components. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. if all system components are assigned. Creating the Piping Systems | 137 . click the Training Files icon. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. Unlike logical connections (systems). click File menu ➤ Save. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. analyses cannot be performed. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems.Piping to make it the active view. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. and double-click 2 . This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. During this exercise. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. after you placed the radiators and boiler. 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. Thus.22 Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. If the System Browser does not respond. In this exercise. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. navigate to the folder of your choice. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the m Creating Piping Systems. and click Save. So. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. click System Browser. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. As you assign radiators to systems. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. 24 In the Save As dialog. then press F9.

6 On the Options Bar. right-click. Notice that after you click . click (Create Hydronic Supply System). All level 2 radiators display in red. 138 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . (Select Equipment for System). the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. click supply system. and click Select All Instances. all other components are unavailable. Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator.Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. and select the boiler to assign it to the Notice that you can select only valid system components. 7 On the Options Bar.

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. right-click. and select the system. The organization is from upstream.The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. click . the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. This display indicates that the new system is selected. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. and click Select to select the system. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. and select the boiler to assign it to the return system. This is because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. Next. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. you create the return piping system. Creating the Piping Systems | 139 . Notice that is does not display. So. press Tab. Thus.

18 In the Save As dialog. These listings represent the systems that you just created. in the next exercise. and click Select. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser.11 The return system displays in red TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and cleared from the Options Bar. 140 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. 17 If you want to save your work. expand Piping. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. 13 Right-click each category. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. click File menu ➤ Save. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. In this exercise. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. or even without pipe being drawn. Now that you logically connected the piping system components.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. In a later exercise. and click OK. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and then select Mechanical Equipment.Piping to make it the active view. you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.Piping view range highlight. and double-click 2 . 4 In the Filter box. Open the m Creating Pipe Runs. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Pipe Runs | 141 . click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Notice that all components that are in the 2 . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. click Check None. 3 On the Options Bar. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators.

This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. the boiler. you can place the cursor over a radiator. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. You can select each system in the dialog to view it. Then. 5 On the Options Bar. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. 142 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. The system displays in red.The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). 7 Click OK. then the Select a System dialog will open. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar. You will need to select a system to create the layout. click Layout Path. Notice that the radiators. 6 In the Select a System dialog.Piping view) TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . press Tab to highlight the system and select it. the return system that logically connects the components display in red. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). select Hydronic Supply 1.

The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Next. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. you create the supply pipe run 300mm from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). verify that Solutions is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Later in this exercise. click Settings. Creating Pipe Runs | 143 . You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. ■ Enter 300 for Inset. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. Enter -375mm for Offset. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. Using this inset. ■ Click (Next Solution). The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green.00° is specified for Slope. You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. verify that Main is selected. 10 On the Options Bar. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. 11 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. It does not reference the architecture.The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. ■ Verify that 0. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. 12 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. and select solution 5.

The layout path is located under the radiators. 15 Click OK. 13 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 14 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. 144 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view.This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 3275mm in the level 1 plenum space. Enter -375 for Offset. click Modify. For more information. zoom the view. select Branch. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. 17 In the drawing area. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. or architecture. and other obstacles. Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 16 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. duct. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. structural beams. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. you now modify the layout path. refer to Help. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings).

Creating Pipe Runs | 145 .A drag control displays. 18 Using the drag control. drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as layout path.

Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created.19 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. or manually modify the pipe. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. select a different layout solution. 20 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. click Finish Layout. 146 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and is not part of the system. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. For example.

Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. This is caused by the hidden line setting. Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. select Fine for Detail Level. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). Creating Pipe Runs | 147 . If a pipe is hidden by an object. To turn off hidden lines. 22 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). In the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar.Change the geometry display 21 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 6. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser.

and click to select them. The design requires 2 zones. 25 Place the cursor over the pipe. Next. Modify the pipe run 24 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings.23 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. select Coarse for single line display. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. So. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. Medium for 2-line duct display. On the View Control Bar. 148 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . or Fine for 2-line pipe display. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 25mm diameter. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. Instead of moving the pipe. Additionally. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides.

28 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). 27 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Creating Pipe Runs | 149 . Next. the logical connection (or system) is still intact.26 Press Delete to delete the selection. 29 On the Options Bar. Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). and click to select it. select 25mm for D: (diameter). you modify the supply pipe run diameter. and click Modify on the Design Bar.

NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. width. press Tab 3 times. Next. If the pipes had different diameters. 30 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 25mm indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. If the entire network does not highlight. and equipment. then you know that a disconnect exists.The diameter of the main and branches change to 25mm. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. fittings. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. 150 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. 31 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Check connectivity 32 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. the diameter would not display. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The first time you press Tab. 33 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights.

Correct a piping disconnect 35 Zoom in on the radiator in Office 8 located in the lower-left corner. This allows you to better see disconnects.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. you can click to select them. This disconnect caused the no auto-route solution warning message to display after creating the piping layout. Creating Pipe Runs | 151 . Notice that the lower-left radiator did not highlight or display in red indicating that it is disconnected. 34 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run. You need to correct the disconnect.

and select it. You need to correct this disconnect by converting an elbow fitting to a tee and then drawing pipe to connect to the tee fitting. Notice that 2 plus signs and 2 connectors display. 36 Zoom in on the upper-right elbow.Notice that the branch did not connect to the main when the pipe run was created. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting. Each control converts the elbow fitting into a tee fittings but with either a vertical or horizontal orientation. 152 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . These plus signs are fitting conversion controls. You may need to zoom the view closer to better see the fitting conversion controls. 37 Click the plus sign located to the left. These controls convert the selected fitting to the next possible fitting for the piping context. Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection.

This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. and click the right plus sign. A minus sign displays. a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting. 38 Click the tee fitting. 39 Click the minus sign to convert back to the elbow fitting. Creating Pipe Runs | 153 . TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control. 40 Click the elbow fitting.

The Draw tool activates enabling you to create pipe. 44 Place the cursor over the end of the tee fitting. select Pipe Types : Standard. click to specify the pipe segment start point. 154 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation. You can now draw the pipe to connect the radiator to the supply pipe run. 42 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and after the fitting end point snap displays. Notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. click Pipe. 43 In the Type Selector. Draw pipe to correct disconnects 41 Zoom out the view to display the disconnected pipe segment and the tee fitting.

you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. use the connector snap. If drawing contiguous segments. Creating Pipe Runs | 155 . and press Spacebar to match the offset (-375) and diameter (25mm) to that of the selected tee connector. Remember to always check connectivity after drawing the pipe segment. you did not begin drawing before pressing Spacebar Note that although the diameter and offset are specified automatically. If you pause briefly. to locate a connector and create the connection. a connection may not occur. click to specify the segment end point. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. the end point of current segment will be the start point of the next segment. and after the connector snap displays. This automatically specifies the pipe diameter and offset (elevation) to match that of the selected start point object. .TIP When using the Draw tool to create pipe. 46 Continue drawing the pipe segment down toward the tee fitting. you can press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and begin drawing. 45 Move the cursor down toward the tee to begin drawing the pipe. If you do not use the connector snap. and then specify an end point. you specify a start point then move the cursor to create the pipe segment. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. NOTE When drawing pipe. TIP When drawing pipe.

and press TAB twice to check connectivity. specify the Detail Level to Fine to display the pipes in 2-line. Next. 50 On the View Options Bar. 48 Place the cursor over the pipe segment. and Spin buttons to verify that the level 2 supply pipe run geometry is as you expected. click (Dynamically Modify View). Scroll. use the Zoom. 156 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 52 In the Dynamic View dialog. The pipe branch including the tee fitting highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 51 On the View toolbar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. Validate the pipe geometry 49 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 47 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. you validate the pipe geometry.The pipe segment is created connecting the radiator to the supply pipe run.

create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. Remember. Select Perimeter solution 3. you create the return pipe run.Next.Piping view. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. ■ In the Layout Path tool. For pipe conversion settings. Verify that 0. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. Create the level 2 return pipe run 53 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. Enter 600 for Inset. Use the same method to correct any disconnects. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Pipe Runs | 157 . Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path.00° is specified for Slope. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 25mm. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system. and enter -525mm for both the main and branch offsets. This places the pipes at a 3125mm elevation in the level 1 plenum space.

corrected disconnects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. 158 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. You checked connectivity. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. and click Save. In the next exercise. Open the m Resolving Pipe Interference. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. click the Training Files icon. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. 55 In the Save As dialog. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. converted fittings. navigate to the folder of your choice. click File menu ➤ Save. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 54 If you want to save your work. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. In this exercise. In this exercise. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs.

and double-click 2 . You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. and the second click specifies the section tail. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell (Conference Room 31). The first click specifies the section head. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. click Zoom in Region. After you add the section. click Section. Resolving Pipe Interference | 159 .1 In the Project Browser. Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Piping to make it the active view. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. and click to specify the section head location.

6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell. A new section view named Section 4 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 160 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail.

The section head and tail display. and click Properties. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. select Fine for Detail Level. The section relocates under Piping. and click OK. Resolving Pipe Interference | 161 . 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 4 view. 7 On the Design Bar.NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 4. click Modify. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. 11 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. select Piping for Sub Discipline. under Graphics. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style.

and after the connectors display. They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. and other aspects of your systems design. mechanical equipment placement. Next. 14 Zoom in on the stairwell. 162 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . place the cursor over the top connector. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase.The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs.Piping to make it the active view.

16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. and after the fitting end point snap displays. release the mouse button to reconnect it.These connectors connect to the tee fittings. 18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe. 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run. Resolving Pipe Interference | 163 .

21 On the Edit toolbar. 19 Zoom out. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. fittings. you split the supply pipe segment.NOTE When modifying pipe. Next. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. click (Split). 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. always connect to pipe segments. 164 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and select the return pipe segment again. 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to 3000mm above the bottom pipe segment connector as shown. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. If you split the pipe. and click to split the pipe at 2160mm from the supply pipe segment connector above.

Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. you convert a tee fitting. and split the supply pipe segment 1400mm from the bottom pipe segment connector. 27 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. Next. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. 26 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. 25 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting. 24 With the Split tool open. and draw the pipe around the stairs. Zoom out the view. Resolving Pipe Interference | 165 . move the cursor down. and press Delete to delete it. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split.

Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. convert the tee fitting from a vertical orientation to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation. 30 In the Type Selector. 166 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 29 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. 31 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 33 Draw the pipe 4000mm to the left.28 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned in the previous lesson. 32 Zoom out the view. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. and move the cursor to the left. and after the end point connector snap displays.

always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry.34 Draw the pipe down. click to specify the segment end point. click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. 35 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. NOTE When drawing pipe. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. Resolving Pipe Interference | 167 . and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. and after the connector snap displays.

36 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool. This activates the Draw tool. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 168 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 38 Right-click the lower connector. 37 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors.The return pipe run is connected as shown.

Second. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. However. specify the reference or start point of the object that you want to move. the pipe diameter. specify the move destination or end point. click to specify the move start point. This needs to be corrected. 44 Place the cursor over the pipe segment and after the centerline snap displays.39 In the Type Selector. or width and height. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 42 Click the pipe segment to select it. Resolving Pipe Interference | 169 . IMPORTANT Using the Move tool is a 2-click process. 43 On the Edit toolbar. Notice that the pipe segment is routed in the stairwell wall. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. click (Move). Move a pipe segment to correct a routing issue 41 Zoom on the top horizontal pipe segment. First. 40 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector.

you confirm and resolve pipe interference with the left staircase. Notice that the adjacent pipe segments and fittings parametrically adjust to the move but the rest of the pipe run and the radiators remain unchanged. Each pipe run and their respective tee fittings highlight indicating that they are physically connected.45 Move the cursor up. 170 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 47 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). and press ENTER to specify the move end point. 46 Place the cursor over each pipe run and press TAB twice to check connectivity. This moves the pipe segment up 100mm away from the wall but still allowing space for sizing. enter100. and after the listening dimensions appear. Next. The interference has been resolved.

The section displays in red. watch the listening dimensions. select Fine for Detail Level. and double-click the section head to open the section view. 56 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 1500mm from its left connector. 53 Zoom in on the stairwell. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. 57 Using the methods that you learned. 50 On the View Control Bar. Otherwise. Although this section was used for air systems. 55 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section. 51 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. 49 Press ESC. you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. 48 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. click (Split). you may get a false positive result. Resolving Pipe Interference | 171 .Piping to make it the active view. 54 On the Edit toolbar. 52 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . and split the supply pipe at 3600mm from its left connector. modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown.

Remember to watch for connector snaps. using the methods that you learned.You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown. 172 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 58 Again.

(2) Connect to a snap. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. preferably a connector snap. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 60 If you want to save your work. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. you used the Split. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Draw. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. Open the m Connecting Boiler. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the next exercise. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name.59 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. 61 In the Save As dialog. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click File menu ➤ Save. the start point.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. Using these 2 methods. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. the pipe type is also matched. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). diameter (or width and height). Then. click the Training Files icon. and click Save. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. Remember that after you create pipe. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). Using Create Similar. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. In this exercise. and offset are automatically specified. Connecting the Boiler | 173 . and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment.

You will design in the 2 . and double-click 2 . the active view is tiled to the left.This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.Piping to make it the active view. TIP When tiling 2 views. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. 174 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown. Note that if this option is unavailable.

11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. This negative offset is based on level 2 because you are designing in the level 2 view. click to specify the first pipe segment start point. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at 460mm from the boiler connection. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. 13 On the Options Bar. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 2150mm from level 1.8 Zoom in on the boiler.8mm. click Pipe. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Notice that the boiler connector offset is at -2176. 14 Move the cursor to the left. Enter -1500 for Offset. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Connecting the Boiler | 175 . 10 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. watch the listening dimensions. ■ Verify that Angle is cleared. and after the connector snap displays.

you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. 15 Draw the pipe up to 900mm.) to separate snap increments. enter -375 for Offset. after listening dimensions display. zoom the view and try again. and click to specify the end point. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. 16 On the Options Bar. TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. 176 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). Remember to always use a semi-colon (. and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. TIP When drawing pipe.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. 3275mm from level 1. click to specify the pipe segment end point. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. 17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. In a later exercise. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar.

Connecting the Boiler | 177 . and after the connector snap displays. release the mouse button to connect to it. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors. 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar.The boiler supply connector pipe is created. 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe.

The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab. 178 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler.Piping view to make it active. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 24 With the windows tiled. 29 Zoom in on the tee. right-click the right connector. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. and click it.Next. convert the elbow to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation. you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run. 27 In the 3D Piping view. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 28 Click in the 2 . Connecting the Boiler | 179 . 26 Using the fitting conversion method that you learned. click the tee to display the connectors.

32 Draw the pipe 600mm to the right and click to specify the segment end point. you will place a circulator pump on this segment. click to specify the end point. 37 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. and after listening dimensions display.The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 180 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 30 In the Type Selector. enter 900 and press Enter. Verify that -1500 is specified for Offset. 35 With the Draw tool activated. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. This creates a 900mm pipe segment. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. Verify that Angle is cleared. In a later exercise. connect the right supply pipe run. 36 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. and the start point is automatically specified. enter -375 for Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 34 On the Options Bar. 33 Draw the pipe up.

Connecting the Boiler | 181 . 39 Validate the pipe geometry.The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler. 38 Check connectivity.

Next. and the 2 . you draw a 150mm pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 40 With the windows tiled. 44 Move the cursor up. 46 Draw the pipe up from the boiler 600mm. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter). 43 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the end point. zoom in on the boiler. 182 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . enter -525 for Offset. This places the return connection 250mm above level 1. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 3125mm from level 1. 45 On the Options Bar. 42 In the Type Selector.Next. and right-click the return connector.Piping the active view. and click Draw Pipe. and enter 150 and press Enter. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -3396mm from level 2. and that Auto Connect is selected. 41 Select the boiler.

the connection is not made. If Auto Connect is selected and your selection point overlaps an object on a different level or plane. If Auto Connect is not selected. Make certain that the 2 .Next. It is important that Auto Connect is not selected. IMPORTANT Auto Connect allows you to connect an object that you are drawing to an object that is located on a different level or plane. verify that Auto Connect is selected. Auto Connect is available on the Options Bar only when the Draw tool is active. click to specify the end point. As you draw. an automatic connection is made. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. the left return pipe is routed under the supply pipe. 47 On the Options Bar. you draw the return pipe to the left. Connecting the Boiler | 183 . 48 Draw a pipe segment to the left and under the supply pipe.Piping and 3D Piping views are tiled to clearly view the Auto Connect behavior. This routing situation provides an opportunity to learn more about the Auto Connect behavior.

53 Again. draw the pipe to the left and under the supply pipe. 184 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 50 Press CTRL+Z to undo the connection and return to the pipe segment. and right-click the top connector.Notice that a green pipe riser symbol displays in the floor plan view. clear Auto Connect. You see it clearly in the 3D view. 52 On the Options Bar. 51 Select the return pipe segment. and the pipe is automatically connected to the supply pipe above. and click Draw Pipe. 49 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw tool. click to specify the end point.

You now have a better understanding of the Auto Connect. On an open pipe segment or run. and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. Connecting the Boiler | 185 . press it once to stop drawing the current object. 55 Select the return pipe segment. select Hidden Line. In the floor plan view. To turn off hidden lines. TIP When drawing pipe. click the specify the end point. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. you finish connecting the boiler to both return pipe runs. 54 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool. right-click the left connector and click Draw Pipe. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. 56 Draw the pipe to the left.Notice that this time the pipe did not connect to the supply pipe above and a green pipe riser symbol did not display. notice that part of the return pipe is hidden as it passes under the supply pipe. Next. press ESC to deactivate the tool. If a pipe is hidden by an object. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. If the pipe segment or run is closed. and twice to deactivate the Draw tool. This is caused by the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting.

convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. click to connect to the left return pipe run.57 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. and after the connector snap displays. 58 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. 60 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls. 186 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 59 Zoom in on the boiler.

right-click the right connector. 62 Draw the pipe 300mm to the right.61 Select the tee fitting. 63 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. and click Draw Pipe. and click to specify the end point. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. Connecting the Boiler | 187 . click to specify the end point.

65 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed.64 Using the method that you learned. and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe. 188 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 66 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run.

you create a section view to verify the clearance between the return pipe riser and the boiler. Next. and adjust the view as shown. draw a section view. 68 Using the section view creation method that you learned.67 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. Connecting the Boiler | 189 .

select Piping for Sub-Discipline. 71 Right-click in the drawing area. 190 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . double-click Section 5 to open the Section 5 view. click Fine for Detail Level. You can also double-click the section head to open the section view. and click Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. This locates the Section 5 view under Piping in the Project Browser and removes the ??? label. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections. click View Properties. 70 In the Project Browser. 72 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 73 On the View Control Bar. under Graphics. 74 Zoom on the boiler return pipe to validate the pipe geometry and check the clearance between the pipe riser and the boiler.69 Click Modify on the Design Bar.

and then you select the point to align. If the Tools toolbar is not available. Next. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes.75 Close the Section 5 view but keep the 2 tiled views open. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process.Piping view. in the 2 . Connecting the Boiler | 191 . First. Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. and after highlights. click (Align).Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. 77 On the Tools toolbar. select the reference point where you want to align. 78 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe. click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. click to specify the alignment reference point. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. 76 With the 2 .

and after the centerline highlights.NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. 79 Move the cursor over the left return pipe. click to specify the point to align. 192 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe.The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. Connecting the Boiler | 193 . 80 Using the alignment method you just learned. 81 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

This is because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that we aligned.The aligned return pipes are as shown. Notice that the return pipe runs also parametrically adjusted. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. 83 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view. 194 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 82 Place the cursor below the tee fitting.

84 If you want to save your work. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. Finally. and double-click 2 . 85 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. and click Save. you size the supply and return piping runs. you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. and after it highlights. connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. Next. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler. click File menu ➤ Save.Piping to make it the active view.Friction & Velocity. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 195 . you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes.The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click to select them. 1 In the Project Browser. Open the m Pipe Sizing . enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name.

The sized pipe runs are sized. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Select And.00 Pa/m. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing. or manually modify the pipe. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select Friction. select a different layout solution. click Sizing. Under Constraints.5 m/s for Velocity. select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing. and enter 250. 196 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Either relocate the system components. and enter 2. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. ■ Click OK. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red. 3 On the Options Bar. and that Restrict Size is cleared.

click File menu ➤ Save. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing. you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. 6 In the Project Browser. Placing Circulator Pumps | 197 . In this exercise. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 8 If you want to save your work. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. enter Pipe Sizing .Friction & Velocity Training for File name. you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs. In the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Save. Placing Circulator Pumps In this exercise. you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized.Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry. 9 In the Save As dialog.

Piping view.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. click the Training Files icon. zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. the active view is the only open window. Open the m Placing Circulator Pumps. You place the pumps in the 2 . Note that if this option is unavailable.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. the active view is tiled to the left. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. TIP When tiling 2 views. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and double-click 2 . Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 . 198 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active.Piping to make it the active view. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser.Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view.

14 Place the cursor over to the left of the pipe opening. and make 2 splits on the left pipe 160mm from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown. 15 Move the cursor over the pipe opening. The selected pipe segment displays in red. 9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool.7 On the Edit toolbar. click to place the circulator pump. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted. 12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and press Spacebar to rotate the pump. Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. 13 In the Type Selector. click Mechanical Equipment. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. click (Split). Placing Circulator Pumps | 199 . You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. and after the centerline snap displays. 8 Watch the listening dimensions. select M_In-line Circulator : M_Standard.

You can also use the Move tool for precise placement. notice that the pump is not located near the selection point. 200 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .TIP If you want to reposition the circulator pump. 16 Press ESC twice. and then move it over the pipe opening. drag the pump away from the pipe. 17 In the 3D Piping view. and watch for the centerline snaps.

release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump. click the pump.Piping view. and after the connector snap displays. you can click in the drawing area. you connect the pump. and select Element Properties. You can also right-click the pump.Actually. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. Next. 21 Click OK. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. You need to specify the pump offset. The selected pump displays in red. click the pipe segment. the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. click .Piping view. Placing Circulator Pumps | 201 . click Modify on the Design Bar. 23 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump. under Constraints. or press ESC. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value. click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. 18 In the 2 . 19 On the Options Bar. If the pump remains selected. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. enter -1500 for Offset. click in the drawing area to clear the selection. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset. 22 In the 2 . To clear the selection.

202 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. 25 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above. After connecting the pump. you need to check connectivity. and press TAB. Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. 26 Place the cursor over the pump. 24 Press ESC to clear the selection.

click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. Next. 27 Using the methods that you just learned. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left. and check connectivity. you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top. 28 With the 2 . 29 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. Placing Circulator Pumps | 203 . connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe.The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

31 Click the rotation control on the right. 32 Using the method that you just learned. The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.30 Click the left pump to display rotation controls. rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. 204 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

do the following: ■ ■ Expand the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous exercises. select the left supply pipe riser. After you assign the components to a system. right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system. Assign the pumps to the supply system 33 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click System Browser. System tools display on the Options Bar. Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. These unassigned components are located in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser.The in-line circulator pumps are rotated. and so on) that you placed to a system. you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment. 34 In the System Browser. Immediately after placement. 35 In the 3D Piping view. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. Placing Circulator Pumps | 205 . they move to their respective system folder. You can also press F9. Expand the Piping folder. Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations.

boilers and AC units. click Finish System. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. NOTE Do not click . and click Save. 40 If you want to save your work. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. navigate to the folder of your choice. Using the System Inspector. such as VAV boxes. 38 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system. the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 37 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. In the next exercise. click (Edit System). System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow. 36 On the Options Bar. pressure. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. Inspecting Piping Systems In this exercise. 39 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. Finally. click Add To System. 206 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure.TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar. click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. 41 In the Save As dialog. If you use this tool. you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. and by clicking the rotation controls. Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder.

click the Training Files icon. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. and double-click 2 . click Zoom in Region from the context menu. System tools appear on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. and pressure information including pressure loss. Right-click a system from the System Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 2 Right-click in the view. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. mechanical equipment. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. System tools display on the Options Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Select the boiler. click Inspect. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number. Open the m Inspecting Piping Systems. fitting. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. and click OK. select any pipe segment. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE To select a system.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. After the System Inspector activates. 6 In the Select a System dialog. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system.Piping to make it the active view. A tooltip also displays this system information. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. click (Inspect). 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. and so on that you have assigned to a system. click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. Inspecting Piping Systems | 207 . select Hydronic Supply 1. flow. and click Inspect from the context menu. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler.

also known as the critical path. Next. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system. and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information. remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump. 208 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. As you inspect.

click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. double-click the 3D Piping view. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector. you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction. In this exercise. you check the piping systems.11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. navigate to the folder of your choice. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and inspect a fin-tube radiator. enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name. and quickly target those systems that need attention. 15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. you need to validate them. use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. and click Save. flow. Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. In the next exercise. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 16 Using the methods that you learned. You also compared system information across a system. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). click File menu ➤ Save. and for pipe sizing. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 17 If you want to save your work. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps. Checking Piping Systems | 209 . and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. 18 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise.

These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. thus assigning the components to a system. Then. click in the drawing area to make it active. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Open the m Checking Piping Systems. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Check Duct Systems. If the System Browser does not respond. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. Warnings display. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. click Check Pipe Systems. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. then press F9. check system warnings may occur. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. In the System Browser. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. The piping system is logically and physically valid. After you assign the system components to a system. the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. 210 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and for pipe sizing. double-click the 2 . As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators. Next. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. For example. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. the pipe is now associated with that system. you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. and click Piping. right-click the Design Bar. you confirm the system component assignments. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser.” 4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. As a tutorial exercise. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Next.Piping to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. However. A message appears indicating the no warning were found.

Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems. 12 In the System Browser. and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. The supply system that you created. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler. you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. otherwise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number. 9 Right-click Default Return Air. The red lines represent the default logical connection. and click Expand All. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply.Piping to make it the active view. double-click 2 Mech to make it the active view. 6 In the Project Browser.Because you assigned all piping components. Checking Piping Systems | 211 . click Close. collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. TIP If you have multiple views open. you confirm the piping system assignments. 10 Using the same methods.

a boiler. it is a valid system without problems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). 17 In the Save As dialog. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. specify 2975mm for the supply and 2825mm for the return pipe offset elevation. navigate to the folder of your choice. 15 Using the methods that you learned. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. Depending on your air systems design. 3D. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. For pipe offset. Explore different system designs. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2008. and fin-tube radiators. The completed mechanical systems are included in the m Completed Mechanical Systems. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. the creation and modification methods remained the same. 16 If you want to save your work. In this tutorial. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. Finally. parametrically modify those designs. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. For additional practice. and section views. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe connections and creating logical systems. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. circulator pumps. and click Save. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. In the lesson. Design the system in the 1 . To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. 212 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files.

it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides.autodesk. go to http://www. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. However. 213 . you can choose to save your work.Electrical Systems 3 In this tutorial. If the tutorial datasets are not present. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. you learn to create electrical systems within the architectural model of a building project. After finishing each exercise.

3 Click Wiring Types. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. and demand factors that are applied in the design. create views for the power and lighting systems at each level in the building. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. and modify your lighting and electrical systems in later exercises. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Value CU-THWN Copper 75 214 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. and click Add. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. For example. has been set to 2300 mm for the building used with these exercises. click the Training Files icon. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. The lighting and power plans are created by copying and renaming architectural views. and demand factors that you will use in your project. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. and in the right pane. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. expand Wiring. power distribution systems. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures.rvt. in the left pane. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in rooms are above the ceiling level. distribution systems. in the Element Properties dialog for Rooms. You will create the following views for Level 1 and Level 2: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. wiring. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan.Planning Electrical Systems In this lesson you specify electrical settings. the Limit Offset. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. Later. analyze. The electrical settings determine the voltages. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. By creating views that are specific to the electrical system you will be able to design. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Electrical Views. wiring. apply templates to your views. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. then applying the appropriate template to each plan. and prepare the electrical views that you will need to design the electrical system for your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For this reason.

00 V 208.00 V 260.00 V 200.00 V Minimum 110.00 V 280.00 V 220.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 215 . By specifying a range. For example. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition.00 V 480.00 V 490.Parameter Insulation Max Size Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value THWN 500 1. click Voltage Definitions.00 V 460.00 V Maximum 130. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 277 480 Value 120.00 V 277. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions.

click Distribution Systems. this type of system (High. even though this is physically impossible. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 480/277 Wye Phase Three Three Configuration Wye Wye Wires 4 4 L-L 208 480 L-G 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. 216 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. 9 Click Demand Factors. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. 8 In the right pane. For example. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Red.

You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10.000VA 10. 10 Click OK. Create 2 copies of the level 2 floor plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list.Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. create another copy of level 1. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. You can specify one or more Demand Factors. for Name. or Other systems in your project based on their load.000VA 3. enter 1-Power. For example. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new view called Copy of Level 1 is created. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. and click Rename. 14 Using the same method. Power. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. and rename it 1-Lighting. Create views for your electrical plans 11 In the Project Browser. leave the default settings as shown here. right-click Level 1. and click OK. and rename them as follows: ■ ■ 2-Power 2-Lighting Preparing the Electrical Plan | 217 . For this exercise. ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads.000VA 10. HVAC. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range. at any given time.000VA. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load.000VA. 13 In the Rename View dialog. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. 12 Right-click Copy of Level 1.

select the following families: ■ ■ M_Lighting Switches. 16 Right-click Copy of Level 1. select Power Plan from the list of templates. 23 In the Project Browser. and apply the Electrical Ceiling Plan template to the 2-Ceiling Elec view. expand Ceiling Plans. Lighting Plan. right-click Level 1. The 1-Power view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. and click Apply View Template. and click OK. 30 In the Project Browser. Load component families 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. The 1-Lighting view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. enter 1-Ceiling Elec for Name. right-click 1-Lighting.rfa M_Receptacle. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 15 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Select View Template dialog. Apply templates to views Each of the templates that you will apply to your new views specify Electrical for the view discipline. right-click 1-Ceiling Elec. 27 In the Open dialog. click Lighting Plan. and click OK. the view discipline. expand Electrical ➤ Devices. which are available from view templates. 28 While pressing Ctrl. In the following steps you will create a ceiling plan for each level by copying and renaming the ceiling plans that the architect has already created. The 1-Ceiling Elec view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Ceiling ➤ Ceiling Plans branch in the project browser. The templates also specify the sub-discipline for each view. 24 In the Select View Template dialog. and click Apply View Template. you need to apply settings. 25 Using the same method. and causes the architectural components to be dimmed in the view. which further defines their position in the project browser. apply the Power Plan template to 2-Power. Now that you have created views specifically for electrical information. 22 In the Select View Template dialog. expand Families. 21 In the Project Browser. and Electrical Ceiling templates that you will apply to your new views control the visibility of component categories. View templates let you easily control view properties. and click Rename. which places the view under the Electrical branch in the project browser. 218 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . apply the Lighting Plan template to the 2-Lighting view. TIP The Select View Template dialog can also be accessed from the View menu. and the view range. 19 In the Project Browser. The Power Plan. select Electrical Ceiling from the list of templates. 17 In the Rename View dialog.rfa 29 Click Open. and click OK.Create views for your electrical ceiling plans Ceiling grid patterns (only visible in ceiling plans) let you correctly lay out lighting fixtures. and click OK. 18 Repeat the previous 3 steps to create a 2-Ceiling Elec ceiling plan. right-click 1-Power. and click Apply View Template.

Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. has also been added under Lighting Device.Surface. and load the following electrical families from the Equipment folder: ■ ■ ■ M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers.Notice that an Electrical Fixtures ➤ M_Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 219 . 35 Proceed to the next exercise. and demand factors. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. and so on). containing several switch types. reopen the Electrical folder. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. conference rooms. As you loaded each of the component families. In this case the key style is the type of room and. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the rooms within your project. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click Add. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. 33 You can save the open file if you wish. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of rooms (offices. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. “Defining Required Lighting Levels” on page 219. restrooms. enter Required Lighting Level for Name.Surface. Under Parameter Data. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. selected components for your electrical systems. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Open the provided dataset.rfa 32 Open the Electrical folder again and load the M_Troffer Corner Insert. distribution systems. as described below.rfa M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Later. and established the parameters for your wiring. voltages.rfa electrical family from the Lighting Fixtures folder. click the Training Files icon. 31 Using the same method.rfa M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level).rvt. in the Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. In this exercise. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Lighting Levels. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. A Lighting Devices ➤ M_Lighting Switches folder. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of rooms in your project. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

For Type. ■ Click Schedule keys. For Group.Lighting category. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on room type. 8 Click Cancel. select Electrical. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each room. 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Rooms for Category. Select Instance. select Electrical-Lighting. enter Room Lighting Requirements. The new parameter you have just created applies to all rooms in the project. 4 Click OK twice.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. select Illuminance. and when the cross-hairs display. click (Properties). To verify this. move the cursor over the room in the upper-left corner. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. you can look at the properties for one of the rooms. However. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Rooms under Electrical-Lighting in the Room Element Properties dialog. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 220 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . select Rooms. In the Element Properties dialog. click to select the room. there are many rooms in this project that have similar lighting requirements. For Name. Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Under Categories. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. 7 On the Options Bar.

NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. ■ Click OK. 12 Click OK. Enter a room type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of rooms in the project. the Key Schedule should looks like this: Defining Required Lighting Levels | 221 . Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the Room component. The new rows are added with 1 through 7 as the default Key Names. according to the values in the following table: Room Type Private Office Open Office Lounge Restroom Conference Mech/Elec Stair/Circulation Lighting Level (lx) 325 540 270 325 375 215 215 When completed. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. click New 7 times to add 7 rows in the key schedule. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each room type. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. enter Lighting Levels. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. one for each type of room in the building.■ For Key Name. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. The key schedule displays in the drawing area.

NOTE Generally. and other users would not be able to perform operations covered in this exercise. this view might well be part of a workset checked out by the architect. In the Project Browser. select multiple rooms of the same type (for example. the value that you entered for this room type in the key schedule. 21 Using the same method. and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 540 lx. 17 Move the cursor over the room until a cross-hair displays. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and for Lighting Level parameter. While pressing Ctrl. the Level 1 floor plan would be thought of as the architect’s view. and click Element Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. and select Open Office. continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining rooms in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple rooms of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog. right-click in the Room Lighting Requirements schedule. 19 Scroll up to the Electrical . 16 Zoom in on the large open area in the center of the floor plan. For tutorial purposes. then right-click one of the selections. then right-click. You can change the sort keys for the schedule. scroll down to the Identity Data category.TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. in the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected rooms. under Instance Parameters. Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Number 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Name Open 1 Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Stairwell Office Office Office Key Name Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 222 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click . double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. click Properties and. Assign room keys to the rooms in the project 15 In the Project Browser. 20 Click OK.Lighting category. The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Room Lighting Requirements key schedule. under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. In a worksharing environment. Office). assume you would have full access to this view.

and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels | 223 . “Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels” on page 223. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Number 19 20 21 2 6 7 8 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Name Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical/Electrical Open 2 Office Office Office Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical / Electrical Lounge Office Office Office Office Stairwell Conference Room Office Office Key Name Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish. In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the rooms in your project. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. as described below. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. selecting a room type for your new Room Variables parameter in a room’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. Open the provided dataset. you could create a key schedule named Room Variables. Room color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the room components. For example. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component. if required. Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values according to room type. Consequently. Room color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to rooms based on specific room parameters. In this exercise you will create a room color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise.

3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 14 Click OK twice. for Name. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. 7 Click OK. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. select Underline. enter Required Lighting Levels. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. 6 For Color. for the Color. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Color Fills. and place it in the drawing. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Rooms for Category. and click (Duplicate). select Required Lighting Level. 224 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and click OK. click Color Scheme Legend.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. select Show Title. and click OK. and click OK. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Required Lighting Level.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. enter Required Lighting. for Title. click Edit/New. and click Element Properties. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. Under Title Text. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Required Lighting .

16 Make the Level 2 floor plan the active view. 17 Using the same method, activate the color scheme as you did for Level 1. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. You can have more than one color scheme in the project, but only one per plan. 18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for rooms, or for any parameter that you want to create for a room (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise).

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels
In this exercise you create a room lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each room against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project, you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/- 55 lx range specified in the schedule. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Schedule Lighting Requirements.rvt.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 225

Create room lighting analysis schedule
1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Rooms. For Name, enter Room Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Click OK.

3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane

Create a new schedule parameter
4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog, click Calculated Value. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, enter Average Estimated Illumination - Required Lighting Level.

NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab:
■ ■ ■

For Sort by, select Number. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.

8 On the Formatting tab, under fields, select Lighting Delta. 9 Click Conditional Format. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Field, select Lighting Delta. For Test, select Not Between. For Value, enter -55 lx and 55 lx in the text boxes.

226 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

11 Click the Background Color chip. 12 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, click the red color chip. 13 Click OK twice. 14 On the Formatting tab, under Fields, select Ceiling Reflectance, and click Field Format. 15 In the Format dialog:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use default settings. For Units, verify that Fixed is selected. For Rounding, select 2 decimal places.

16 Click OK. 17 Using the same method, specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. 18 Click OK.

19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next lesson, “Designing the Electrical System” on page 228. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the rooms as 0. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the rooms. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each room, and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. This is because the value is not within the range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. In this exercise, you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 227

Designing the Electrical System
In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices, electrical equipment, and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. Once the equipment is in place, you will create power and lighting circuits, and make connections to electrical equipment.

Adding Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. As you select and place lighting fixtures, the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each room’s lighting requirement. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Adding Lighting Fixtures.rvt.

Place the initial lighting fixture
1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules, and double-click Room Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column, and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance, Wall Reflectance, Floor Reflectance, and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. Only the Number, Name, Average Estimated Lighting, and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. NOTE Right-click a heading, and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. 4 On the Windows menu, click Close Hidden Windows. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. 6 In the Project Browser, under Ceiling Plans, double-click 1-Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid, and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view. 7 On the Windows menu, click Tile, and arrange the windows as shown.

228 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

8 In the 1-Ceiling Elec view, zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Light Fixture. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 3 Lamp, and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. 11 With the cursor in the room in the upper-left corner of the plan, click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection.

12 Click Modify. 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture, select it, and on the Toolbar, click (Move).

14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture, and when Endpoint displays, click to specify the start point.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 229

15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture, and click when Intersection displays.

In the Room Lighting Analysis Schedule, the Lighting Delta for room 3 is changed from -325 lx to -118 lx, closer to the required +/- 55 lx. The current line weight settings for the lighting fixture and ceiling grid make it difficult to distinguish the outline of the lighting fixture from the ceiling grid lines. Adjusting the line weight for the lighting fixtures will make it easier to place the remaining lighting fixtures.

Change line weight to adjust lighting fixture visibility
16 Right-click anywhere on the view background, and click View Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Reflected Ceiling Plan: 1-Ceiling Elec dialog, scroll down to Lighting Fixtures, click in the Projection/Surface-Lines column, and click Override. 19 In the Line Graphics dialog, under Lines, for Weight, select 5. 20 Click OK 3 times.

230 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

The fixture you placed now displays as shown.

Copy and place additional lighting fixtures
21 Select the lighting fixture, and on the Toolbar, click 22 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. 23 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point, and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of the level 1, as shown. (Copy).

Check the illumination levels against the Room Lighting Analysis schedule
24 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 231

The Average Estimated Illumination for rooms 3, 4 and 5 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 325 lx, but is still not within the +/- 55 lx range, so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these rooms.

To adjust the illumination level downward, you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each room with a 2-lamp fixture. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. Point by point analysis is not currently supported.

Change lighting fixture type
25 In the 1-Ceiling Elec, select one of the lighting fixtures in each room, and in the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 2Lamp. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. If you select a component inadvertently, press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. 26 Again, check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range.

The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/- 55 lx range. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. 27 Using the same method, continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1-Ceiling Elec and 2-Ceiling Elec views. Use the Room Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. When you are finished, only the Mechanical/Electrical rooms (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 are shown below along with the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

232 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 1

NOTE Ceiling grids were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical rooms; therefore, you cannot add lighting fixtures to these rooms.
Level 2

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 233

28 In the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, right-click one of the headings, and click Unhide All Columns.

With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms, your Lighting Delta column for all of the rooms should be white. 29 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 31 Proceed to the next exercise, “Placing Lighting Switches” on page 234. In this exercise, you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans, and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225.

Placing Lighting Switches
In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Switches.rvt.

Place switches in rooms
1 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 2 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 3 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole. 4 On the Options Bar, verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

5 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of room 3.

234 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host, it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the room as shown, and click to place the switch.

7 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining rooms in the 1-Lighting view as shown.
Level 1

8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, and in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way. 9 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 235

10 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

11 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Four Way. 12 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown.

236 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

13 In the open office area, place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown.

14 In the Project Browser, double-click 2-Lighting to make it the active view. 15 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way, and place a switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 237

16 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

17 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset. On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole, and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown.

238 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 2

18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Placing Power Receptacles” on page 239.

Placing Power Receptacles
In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Receptacles.rvt.

Place wall-hosted receptacles
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 4 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard.

Placing Power Receptacles | 239

5 On the Options Bar, verify that

(Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

6 In the left side of the plan, place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown.

7 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown, including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas.

240 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

1-Power

2-Power

Placing Power Receptacles | 241

Place floor-hosted receptacles
8 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard. 11 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Work Plane), and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected for Plane.

NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. The current level is selected by default. 12 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office, and place a receptacle on the floor as shown.

When placing a receptacle on a workplane, its connector is located below the level of the workplane. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures, it is important that the connector be within the Room to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. In the next steps, you will flip the workplane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the workplane. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles.

13 Select the receptacle and click the room). 14 On the Toolbar, click (Copy).

(Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the workplane (within

15 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. 16 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point, and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor, as shown.

242 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

17 Draw a pick box around the four floor-based receptacles, click , select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure, place 3 copies of the flipped receptacles throughout the Level 1 open office, as shown.

18 Using the same procedure, place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2-Power as shown. TIP You can select all of the floor hosted receptacles in the 1-Power view, then copy and paste them in the 2-Power view. Select all 1-Power floor receptacles, click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard, open 2-Power, and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. 19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Placing Power Receptacles | 243

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports” on page 244. In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components, because it is quite common in Revit MEP.

Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports
In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. With the introduction of local energy codes, the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces, you can refer to this report rather than having to measure rooms and count fixtures. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Usage Reports.rvt. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, scroll down the Category list, and select Rooms. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected, and for Name, enter Power & Lighting Usage. 4 Click OK. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area

6 Click OK. A schedule is created similar to the one shown.

244 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Placing Electrical Equipment | 245 . In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. Open the provided dataset. as described below. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. and work toward the higher voltage. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. “Placing Electrical Equipment” on page 245. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).7 You can save the open file if you wish. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

and double-click 1-Power. 4 In the Type Selector. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. and for Panel Name.Surface : M_250A.Loads. for Distribution Sys. scroll down to the Electrical . and click to place the panel as shown. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. click . click Electrical Equipment. 5 On the Design Bar. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. 246 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 6 On the Options Bar. click the Training Files icon.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room between the 2 restrooms. under Electrical . select M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : M_45kVA. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. click Modify and select the panel you just placed. click Element Properties. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Type Selector. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. select Electrical Equipment. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Right-click the panel. select 480/277 Wye. select M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Loads category. Add a transformer 10 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical room to the right of the panel as shown.rvt. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Electrical Equipment. under Instance Parameters. 9 Click OK.

20 Select the panel you just placed. under Instance Parameters. under Instance Parameters. 18 In the Type Selector. For Panel Name. enter T1. Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar. select M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution Sys.Loads category. 14 On the Options Bar. click .Surface : M_100A.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to the Electrical . 16 Click OK. enter L-1. 19 Click Modify. select 120/208 Wye. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System.Loads category. for Distribution Sys. 21 On the Options Bar. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter. and on the Options Bar. scroll down to the Electrical . select 480/277 Wye. and on the Options Bar. select Electrical Equipment. 23 Click OK. select 120/208 Wye. Placing Electrical Equipment | 247 . click . and place the panel to the right of the transformer. Since this is a transformer. and for Panel Name.

The temporary circuit displays as shown. and select panel H-2 for Panel. . add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 28 On the Options Bar. because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel. select panel L-2. 248 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. and click 30 On the Options Bar. In this case you are going to select something other than the panel. click . 26 On the Options Bar.Surface : M_250A named H-2 M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: M_45kVA named T2 M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . including the Secondary Distribution System for T2.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method.Surface : M_100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. 27 Click (Select Panel). click (Create Power Circuit). A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit. 29 Select the transformer T2. The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer.

and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms side-by-side. select the L-1 panel. 37 Close the 2-Power view. and select the T1 transformer as the panel. click 35 On the Option Bar. A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. and click 39 Click . The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. and on the Options Bar. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. Placing Electrical Equipment | 249 . 34 In the 2-Power view. and select the MDP panel.31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. 38 On the Options Bar. . select the H-2 panel. . click .

44 Proceed to the next exercise. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. lighting. “Creating Power Circuitry” on page 250. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. and click 41 On the Options Bar.40 Select the T1 transformer. You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment.rvt. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. . click . Open the provided dataset. as described below. 250 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and select the MDP panel. and data systems. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Power Circuitry. 42 You can save the open file if you wish. Circuits are used for power.

4 On the Options Bar. leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. and voltage (120 V). For now. click . load (180 VA). A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit. The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. select all the receptacles in the corner room. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. 3 While pressing Ctrl. Creating Power Circuitry | 251 . 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner room.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1).

6 Click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. click circuit. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner room so that it is highlighted. and press Tab. and select panel L-1 as the panel for this NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar.Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the room. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. 252 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). and click to select the circuit again. press Tab.

click Cancel Circuit. respectively for this circuit. under Instance Parameters. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. click .Loads category. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. 1-#6. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. . select Circuit Properties. Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. 15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. creating power circuits. If you select L-1 in the drawing. 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. 1-#12. click . Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. 1-#10. 12 On the Edit Circuit tab on the Design Bar. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. 16 On the Design Bar. scroll down to the Electrical . and select panel L-1. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a room-by-room basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. click (Edit Circuit). In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. and ground wiring. and select panel L-1. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. change the value from 20A to 50A. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. 19 Close the warning message. The currently specified values are 1-#12. When editing a circuit. 1-#12. The editable parameters include Wire Type and Rating will be discussed in a later exercise. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. 22 Click OK. neutral. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. and click Element Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. click The circuit is created. Creating Power Circuitry | 253 . which are the wire sizes for the load. and add it to panel L-1.11 On the Options Bar.

29 Select the L-1 panel. click . and then select panel L-1. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown.24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. as previously described. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. and on the Options Bar. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. These will be connected in a later exercise. 26 Continue creating circuits. 254 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . create circuits in the 2-Power view and assign them to panel L-2. These will be connected in a later exercise. zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. 27 Using the same procedures. 28 Double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. click . 25 On the Options Bar.

In the Edit Circuits dialog. Finally. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. Adding wiring to a project is optional. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. 1 In the Project Browser. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. “Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires” on page 255. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 3 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything.rvt. 30 Click OK. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. you have assigned only 17. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. Open the provided dataset. 2 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 255 . and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. as described below. As you saw in the previous exercise. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. click the Training Files icon.

click Check None to clear all the check boxes. This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). 256 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 7 Close the message window and. 6 On the Options Bar. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. click (Filter).4 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . 5 In the Filter dialog. click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation. 8 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown. as shown. Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected.

Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. click . This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. click . and then select panel MDP as the panel for the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 257 . click .9 On the Options Bar. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. When creating wires. as in this step. or floors. ceilings. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring.

13 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the large room and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. and click the switch to select the switches. 17 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. but with an additional vertex. enter 2 as the value. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. and assign the circuits to panel MDP. one neutral conductor. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. 12 On the Options Bar. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. click Check None. ground) in the wire run. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. 16 Using the same method. under Instance Parameters. you can specify splined wiring. when you create wiring manually. lighting fixtures. neutral. press Tab. and one ground conductor). 14 On the Options Bar. for Hot Conductors.In this step. Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 11 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. select Wires. you created arc type wiring. click . Later. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 258 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . When this occurs. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. enter 2. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. and click OK. Splined wiring is similar to arc. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click . In the next steps. and click OK.

and restrooms in the 2-Lighting view. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260. assign the circuit to panel H-2. and assign the circuits to panel H-2.18 For more practice. These will be connected in a later exercise. then creating lighting circuits in 2-Lighting. 20 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 259 . 19 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1-Lighting view. conference room. lounge. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. Otherwise.

rvt. assign lighting fixtures to switches. and panel information. but does not prevent you from doing so. click (Create Switch System). Open the provided dataset. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. fixtures. 1 In the Project Browser. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon.21 You can save the open file if you wish. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Switch Systems. 260 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 3 On the Options Bar. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. you will create a room schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as described below. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. and specify switch IDs for switches. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260.

Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding the switch). ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. click (Edit Switch System).4 Click (Select Switch for System). click Remove From System. When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. The Edit Switch System tab is activated on the Design Bar. Creating Switch Systems | 261 . 5 On the Options Bar. After creating the switch system. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. 7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. select Multiple. and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. click Finish to confirm your selections. 6 On the Edit Switch System tab. and on the Options Bar. you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. With Multiple selected on the Options Bar.

click Finish System. 16 Click Switch Properties. under Instance Properties. . click Finish System. click 14 Click . click Finish. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. for Switch ID. 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. for Switch ID. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Edit Switch System tab. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and select the switch on the wall outside the ladies’ restroom. click Select Switch. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. enter North Stairwell . under Instance Properties. 262 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . enter Main Entrance . 18 On the Edit Switch System tab. 9 Click Switch Properties. The Number of Fixtures field now displays 26 fixtures remaining in the system. 20 Click . click .West. and on the Options Bar.8 On the Options Bar.1st Floor. 15 On the Edit Switch System tab.

select Number. Verify that Ascending is selected. scroll down the Available fields list. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. and restrooms in the 1-Lighting view. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. For Name. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. scroll down the Available fields list. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. select Number from the Fields list. Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Switch Systems. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. enter Room Number.21 Using the same method. 26 On the Formatting tab. select Rooms. and for Heading. stairwell. Creating Switch Systems | 263 .

33 Proceed to the next exercise. Create separate systems for the lounge. Open the provided dataset. The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. click the Training Files icon. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run.The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. conference room. and private offices. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specify Open Area . “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264. Otherwise. restrooms. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the room containing that system.2nd Floor for the switch ID. as described below. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. continue creating switch systems in the 2-Lighting view. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 264 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 30 For more practice. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close.

rvt. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 265 . 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. click Wire. 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper rooms are visible. 8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. 5 Using the same method. move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it. verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. 6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper rooms. 2 Zoom in on the room at the upper-left corner of the plan. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit.■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. and delete both home runs. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining rooms along the left side of the plan. 3 In the corner room. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit.

10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top room to specify the start point for the wire. as shown. 11 Click in the open space near the door for the room to specify the second point for the wire. 12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle room to specify the endpoint for the wire. 266 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .

and using the same method. when the wiring is completed.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. When completed. The direction will be corrected. 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower rooms are visible. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower rooms. your layout should look similar to the following: Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 267 . Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. if necessary.

drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the number of hot conductors. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. 14 Click Modify.Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. a shared neutral. as each room was added to the wiring run. 17 Right click the wire run. select Insert Vertex. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower room. and a shared safety ground). 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower room as shown. 268 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. and click. In the previous steps.

The wire behaves like a spline.Vertices let you route wires in your project views. you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1-Power and 2-Power views. Completed 1-Power Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 269 . adjusting its shape according to the vertex location. Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference. 19 For additional practice. or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise.

Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Checking Your Design.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. 270 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . Open the provided dataset. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. “Checking Your Design ” on page 270. 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner room is visible. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. as described below. click the Training Files icon. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area.rvt. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows.

Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. and expand Unassigned. and click Select. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. 7 In the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP). expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. and 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 2. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. release the mouse button. 5 Resize the columns in the System Browser until all of the columns are visible without scrolling. 8 In the System Browser. 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. Checking Your Design | 271 .4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. 6 Right-click in a column heading in the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the room in which the devices are located. The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1-Power. collapse Power.

You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. 272 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area. 16 Click Finish Circuit. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2. and on the Options Bar. The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2-Lighting view have not yet been connected.10 Open the 1-Lighting and 2-Lighting views and close any windows. click to create permanent wiring. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. click . and on the Options Bar. 17 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. 15 Click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. click to select the circuit. 14 On the Edit Circuits tab on the Design Bar. In the System Browser. 13 In the 1-Lighting view. press Tab. click Add to Circuit.

In the System Browser. 25 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. and click OK. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 23 In the Project Browser. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. 20 In the Filter dialog. 21 Click . arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. press Tab. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. under Instance Parameters. click Check None.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. 19 On the Options Bar. for Hot Conductors. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. click . 18 In the 1-Lighting view. and click OK. 24 In the drawing area. click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. Checking Your Design | 273 . select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. enter 2. select Wires.

create a power circuit for the 5 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. select panel L-1. 274 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . to create permanent wiring. click 27 Click . and in the Mechanical/Electrical room. The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category. click Check Circuits.26 On the Options Bar. Check Circuits 29 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 28 Using the same method. 30 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector.

click the Training Files icon. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. Defining Circuit Loads | 275 . Finally. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Circuit Loads. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 32 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as described below. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. 33 Close the Warning dialog.31 Click to view details of the warning. Open the provided dataset. “Defining Circuit Loads” on page 275. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

276 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 3 On the Options Bar. Examination of the loads on Phase A. B. 2 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. click . and double-click 2-Power. 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. and C shows a slight imbalance with the heaviest load on Phase B (4860 VA). and Phase C provides 4140 VA. click Rebalance Loads. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded.Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. while Phase A provides 4500 VA. In the Project Browser. select panel L-2.

H-2 is a 100A panel. 6 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. After the loads are balanced. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel MDP. and circuits 7. and for T1. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. and the T1 transformer. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. you may see different values for the loads. 13 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. and on the Options Bar. enter 100A for the Trip value. enter 40A for the Trip value. a load of 18844 VA.After re-balancing loads. a load of 12780 VA. Therefore. the distribution is shifted. for panel H-2. 9. and 6 feed transformer T1. select M_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. 11 Click OK. Defining Circuit Loads | 277 . 8 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. 12 In 1-Power view. the values for circuits 1 and 3 are the load presented by the lighting circuits on Level 1 (5664 VA). NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. in the Mechanical/Electrical room. and 11 feed panel H-2. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. Had there been a greater imbalance. the load connected to it is less than 15kVA. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. the H-2 panel. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. 10 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. 4. L-1 and MDP. 5 Select panel H-2. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. Therefore. so no further changes are required. you can use a 30kVA transformer. select the T1 transformer. double-click 1-Power. click . Circuits 2. click . The values on the right side shows the load presented by transformer T1 (12780 VA).

00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. and click Element Properties. 15 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. 22 Scroll down.14 In the Error dialog. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. The transformer is now rated at 30kVA. 18 Click OK. 25 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. click (Circuit Properties). select panel L-1. 26 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Notice that it changes to 3-#3. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. 100. click the drop-down list on the Options Bar. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. for transformer T2. . enter 100A for Rating. click . 1-#12. 1-#3. 19 With panel L-1 selected. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. Verify/adjust wire sizes 16 Right-click panel L-1. but must be reconnected to the power circuits. on the Options Bar.00A. double-click 2-Power to make it the active view. 278 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . select panel H-2. 1-#12. 1-#8. 21 Under Electrical-Loads. enter 40A for the Trip value. 20 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. and on the Options Bar. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. and select T1 from Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. under Instance Parameters. 23 Click OK. click Disconnect. 24 In the Project Browser.

under Electrical Loads. but must be reconnected to the power circuits. 39 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. 32 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties. The transformer is now rated at 30kVA. 34 Click OK. 30 In the Error dialog. 31 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. 37 Close the Warning. selectM_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Instance Parameters. click . A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 38 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. . Size the service entrance conductors 35 In the Project Browser. 36 With the MDP panel selected. 29 In the Type Selector.27 Click OK. select T2. This completes the Electrical Tutorial. and on the Options Bar. in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. . you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. select the T2 transformer. Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. click Disconnect. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. Defining Circuit Loads | 279 . 28 In the 2-Power view. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. select panel L-2.00A.

280 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .

you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. At the end of this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. including plumbing fixtures. As you create the plumbing system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. hot and cold water piping. you will understand the process. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. By following this workflow. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. and sanitary piping. methodology. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2008. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. However.autodesk. go to http://www. If the tutorial datasets are not present.Plumbing Systems 4 In this tutorial. After finishing each exercise. 281 . you can choose to save your work.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures.rfa M_Wall Hung Urinal. 6 In the Project Browser. In this lesson. Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. All of the loaded families. 282 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . The selected component families are loaded into the project. click the Training Files icon. planning is critical to a successful design. You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: M_Toilet . 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing.rfa 5 Click Open. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Loading Plumbing Families.rfa M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click the Training Files icon.Wall Mounted Flush Valve and Wall Hung Urinal. “Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems” on page 283. 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families. are added under Families in the Project Browser. 12 You can save the open file if you wish. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP.rfa 11 Click Open. 3 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing.Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

11 Click File menu ➤ Close. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 10 You can save the open file if you wish. under Mechanical. select M_Pipe Glued Short Sanitary Tee: Standard For Tap. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Configuring Plumbing Pipe Systems.rvt. select M_Pipe Vent Tee: M_Standard For Tap. select None For Cross. 7 Rename the new pipe type. 1 In the Project Browser. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 6 In the Project Browser. “Add Plumbing Fixtures” on page 284. 2 Right-click PVC. click Duplicate.Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise. select None For Cross. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 4 Right-click PVC Sanitary. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. PVC Sanitary Vent. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. select Tee For Tee. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click the Training Files icon. and click Properties. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 283 . under Mechanical. click Rename. select Tee For Tee. 8 Right-click PVC Sanitary Vent. right-click PVC Sanitary. 3 Right-click PVC 2. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: Standard For Transition. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter PVC Sanitary for the new name. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them. and click Duplicate. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. and click Properties. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: M_Standard For Transition. and press Enter.

and double-click 2 . expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Plumbing Fixture. Finally. click the Training Files icon. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 4 Select Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet : Standard in the Type Selector. you add 2 toilets. ZR (Zoom Region). you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. you create systems to logically connect the fixtures. 3 sinks.Plumbing to make it the active view. 284 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 3 wall-mounted urinals. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room. In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Adding Plumbing Fixtures. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then modify the piping. 5 On the Options Bar verify that (Place on Work Plane) is selected. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room. The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. and 3 sinks.rvt.Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. 3 urinals.

and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 460 from the right wall. 7 Move the cursor into the stall to the left. click to place the toilet. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 285 . and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 400 from the right wall. (Place on 10 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. and when the preview of the urinal is 500 from the left wall. Place wall-mounted urinals 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.6 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. click to place the toilet. click Plumbing Fixture. and on the Options Bar. 9 Select Wall Hung Urinal : Standard in the Type Selector. click to place the toilet. verify that Vertical Face) is selected.

click the centerline of each urinal. You will use the Dimension tool to space them evenly along the wall. verify that References is selected for Pick. move the cursor up. and Individual 15 Click the centerline of the left wall. Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. click Dimension. 13 On the Design Bar. (The placement is not critical. 16 Move the cursor down. 286 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 17 Using the same method. 14 On the Options Bar. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. and click.11 Place a second urinal near the wall of the leftmost toilet stall. and click to place the dimension annotation. 18 Working from left to right. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. as shown and place a third urinal between the other 2 urinals. (Aligned) is selected. and click to place the dimension annotation.) 12 Click Modify.

click Plumbing Fixture. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 287 . select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. select Pick a plane. The urinal is placed 500 from the wall of the toilet stall. and enter 500. and press Delete. 25 In the drawing area. 21 While pressing Ctrl. 26 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. Place sinks 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 23 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane). select the counter top.19 Select the rightmost urinal. and for Plane. select Sink Single Island : Public. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click the blue dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. click the value for the blue dimension. (Equal Control) above the 20 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. 24 In the Work Plane dialog. select Pick. Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. and in the Type Selector. and click OK.

31 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. equalize the space between sinks. 288 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and place a third sink between the other 2 sinks as shown.27 Place the sink 560 from the left wall and 460 from the lower wall. specify the distance between the rightmost sink and the right wall as 560. click Dimension. 29 Click Modify. 28 Place a second sink near the right wall. 30 On the Design Bar. and then delete the dimension annotations. (The placement is not critical.

urinals. and click View Properties. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Starting the Sanitary Piping System. and click to place the floor drain. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. under Extents. and click Edit. click Plumbing Fixture. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 289 . Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and double-click 2 . 38 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. as shown. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. “Begin Creating the Sanitary System ” on page 289. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 34 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. select M_Round Floor Drain : 125. and floor drain. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing to make it the active view. 35 Click Modify. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 You can save the open file if you wish.Place the floor drain 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. scroll down to View Range. In this exercise. and in the Type selector. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and for Plane. 33 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane).rvt. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. select Level : Level 2. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

20 Move the cursor over the chase. select Pipe Sanitary Outlet : Standard. click View ➤ Piping. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Sanitary from the System Type list. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. and in the Type Selector. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. 16 Right-click in the system browser table. 9 In the right panel. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. specify -1500 for Bottom Offset. 18 Zoom in on the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room. specify -300 11 In the left panel. under Primary Range. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. specify Fine for Detail Level. and under View Depth. and click Main. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 290 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . NOTE If you do not find the sanitary outlet among any of the families included with Revit MEP. Click Window ➤ System Browser.4 In the View Range dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Mechanical Equipment. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 19 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. click Branch. specify -1500 for Level Offset. The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. specify -300 13 Click OK. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. you can copy the sanitary outlet from this tutorial into your other projects. 5 Click OK twice. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. 21 Click Modify. click Mechanical Settings. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. and click to place the sanitary outlet approximately as shown.

25 On the Options Bar. The urinals. and click Element Properties. under Constraints. 22 The elevation of the sanitary outlet with relation to the other components in the system is critical.The sanitary outlet is added to the Unassigned folder in the system browser. and click OK. enter -1200 for Offset. click (Create Sanitary System). toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. 26 On the Options bar. Right-click the sanitary outlet in the view. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. toilets. as shown. and floor drain. and click the sanitary outlet in the drawing Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 291 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The elevation will be specified as -1200. (Select Equipment for System). low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. click area. 24 Zoom in on the men’s room.

292 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . enter 1. 28 Click Solutions. click Layout Path. as shown. to view them. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. click Modify. see Layout Paths. and on the Design Bar. For more information on Layout Path solutions. 30 Select solution 1 of 6. and on the Options Bar. 31 Select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal.The sanitary outlet is added to Sanitary 1 in the System Browser and the sanitary piping system is previewed in the view. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. 27 On the Options Bar. as needed. Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. and use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment into the middle of the chase above the urinals.00 for Slope. You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). 29 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.

and drag it into the chase. in line with the branch segment.32 Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 293 . 33 Click Finish Solution.

and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. as shown. The second tab highlights the fixture. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. 294 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and check the slope control. Select each pipe segment in the system. ■ ■ Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. slope.34 Examine the piping that was automatically placed using the Layout Path tools. and orientation of fittings: ■ Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. checking for the proper connectivity. The third tab should highlight the entire system. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. When fittings are reversed.

and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 38 Click OK. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 295 . specify Fine for Detail Level. 36 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. 39 On the View Control Bar. 37 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.35 In the Project Browser. Enter the keyboard shortcut. VG (Visibility/Graphics). and double-click 3D Plumbing. click Show categories from all disciplines.

Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 2 . 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing to make it the active view. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Connecting Sink Drain Lines. 296 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet.rvt.40 You can save the open file if you wish. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. adding the sinks in the men’s room. In the left pane of the Open dialog. “Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System” on page 296 to continue creating the sanitary system. click the Training Files icon.

00 for Slope Angle. and when the extension snap displays. enter 3950. 10 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. enter 1000 for Slope Run. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. click Options. and press Enter. and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard in the Type Selector. 8 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. When you press the space bar. enter 1. and click Draw Pipe. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 297 . you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. click to place the fitting. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. click Pipe Fitting. right-click the connector on the open leg. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 6 In the Layout Options dialog. press the Space Bar once.4 Select the tee. 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 7 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. If you select the pipe. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning.

298 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. and select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard in the Type Selector. click to specify the end of the pipe. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. highlight the wye. and when the wall centerline snap displays. and click OK. 15 Select the wye fitting. click Pipe Fitting. right click the connector on the open leg. click Options. click the size for the wye leg. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.00 for Slope Angle. and when the extension snap displays.11 Select the fitting. and press Enter. 16 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. enter 50. and on the Options Bar. 17 In the Layout Options dialog. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. click to place the fitting. verify that the slope is specified as 1. 14 Using the method learned earlier. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down toward the centerline of the wall below the sinks.

In this case. the vertical pipe extends 150 above the level of the floor. 21 In the Project Browser. click to specify the end of the pipe. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 299 . Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. 20 On the Options Bar. enter 150 for Offset. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. click Apply.19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. and click Modify.

25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. and click to place the fitting. 22 In the 3D view. specify 200 for Offset. 24 On the Plumbing tab. enter 45. 300 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 32 Click Modify. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 27 Zoom in on the double wye. and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued Double DWV Wye : Standard. and on the Options Bar. 29 Click the connector snap on the right leg. and on the Options Bar. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. 28 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. 30 In the Layout Options dialog. click Pipe. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.If necessary. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described in the previous exercise. This is best done by carefully following these steps. click to specify the end of the pipe. 26 Select the double wye fitting. In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye.00 for Slope Angle. and click OK. click Pipe Fitting. click Options. The double wye is added to the vertical segment as shown above. 31 Drag the pipe to the right. press Space. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. and when Horizontal and Extension displays.

Plumbing. and press Delete. click to specify the end of the pipe. and on the Options Bar. 34 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.00 for Slope Angle is specified. 46 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 301 . and double-click 2 . click Pipe again. 43 Click Modify. 42 On the Options Bar. 38 Click Modify. and press Delete. 45 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. click the connector snap. click Options. and another segment of pipe. 36 In the Layout Options dialog. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. 41 Move the cursor over the center leg of the fitting. 44 In the Project Browser. verify that 45. and click Draw Pipe. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. 39 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. 37 Drag the pipe to the left. specify 400 for Offset. and click Apply. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 40 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and when Horizontal and Extension displays. and click OK.This adds a short segment of pipe from the wye. 33 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. an elbow. click Pipe again. and select the leftmost sink.

51 Select Pipe again. drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall. 50 Click Modify. and click OK. 52 In the Project Browser. specify 0. 49 On the Options Bar. click Options. 302 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . double-click 3D Plumbing. specify 450 for Offset. select the 3 short segments of pipe connected to the double wye. specify 40 mm for Size. 48 In the Layout Options dialog. and on the Options Bar.00 for Slope Angle. and click to specify the end of the pipe. and on the Options Bar. and use the same method to connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. 54 While pressing Ctrl. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.47 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. 53 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting.

Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. click Routing Solutions. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. and on the Options Bar. You use (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through the up to 6 proposed solutions. click Routing Solutions.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 55 While pressing Ctrl. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. 56 On the Options Bar. 57 Select solution 3 of 3. Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. 63 On the Options Bar. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. select the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 3 of 3. 61 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. and select a proposed solution. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 303 . 60 Using the same method. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. 59 Select solution 2 of 2. 58 While pressing Ctrl. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points).

65 Using the same method. 68 On the Design Bar. Now that the routing is completed. The arrow points away from the reference end of the slope. select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. When the piping was created for the sink drains. right-click Sanitary 1. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. 66 In the System Browser. and in the Type Selector.64 Enter 1. The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. click (Pick Aligning Element) to toggle the reference end for the slope. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. and click Finish. click Add to System. 304 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .00 for Slope. 69 One at a time. modifying offset values. there is a smaller movement. specify the slope for the piping for the remaining sinks. you can make minor adjustments to the system. select all 3 sinks. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. 67 On the Options Bar. 71 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. M_Pipe PVC Bend : M_Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. you can change these to the more commonly used M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. such that the arrow is pointing away from the double wye fitting. You can move fixtures by dragging. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 70 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. When zoomed in close. 72 While pressing Ctrl. click (Edit System). and click Select. expand Sanitary ➤ M_Pipe Sanitary Outlet : M_Standard. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke depends is proportional to the zoom level. You could have entered a negative value for slope and clicked to specify the end closest to the sink as the reference (with the arrow pointing toward the double wye). and click Finish System. select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard.

77 Click File menu ➤ Close. (After the third tab.73 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 305 . click File menu ➤ Save As.) 75 If you want to save your work. highlight the leftmost sink. skip the next 2 steps. otherwise. 76 You can save the open file if you wish. the entire system should be highlighted. 74 Using the method learned earlier. and select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard in the Type Selector. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

and click to specify the endpoint for the move as shown. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Waste Stack Connection. 306 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 5 Zoom in on the sanitary outlet. 7 Drag the preview approximately 200 along the horizontal line away from the elbow. 6 Click on the sanitary outlet to specify a start point for the move as shown.rvt. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.78 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. 4 Select the upper elbow. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. adjusting the sanitary stack. click the Training Files icon. select it and on the toolbar. click (Move). 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. while maintaining the same angle. and press Delete. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. and select the horizontal pipe. 1 In the Project Browser. and carefully drag it away from the elbow. “Refining the Sanitary Stack” on page 306 to continue creating the sanitary system.

10 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe. specify 150 for D (diameter). and when the Extension snap displays. and on the Options Bar. Add a reducing wye to the stack 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Pipe Fitting.8 Select the elbow and vertical pipe segment. and click to place the fitting. and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard. press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). Refining the Sanitary Stack | 307 .

14 On the View tab on the Design Bar. select the wye. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. and click piping. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. and click Modify. double-click 2 . enter 100 to change its size. The wye is added to the vertical segment. If necessary. and press Enter. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward the sanitary 12 Select the wye. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 13 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.11 Click Modify. click the value for the 45 degree leg. 308 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Section.Plumbing.

click Options. parallel to the main segment of pipe from the toilets. enter -750 for Offset. 16 On the View Control Bar. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 22 In the Layout Options dialog. and click OK. double-click 3D . specify Fine.Plumbing. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. 23 Drag the pipe to the left and down. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 309 . and press Enter.15 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. 18 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the end of the pipe. enter 45. 21 Click the connector on the 45 degree leg. 20 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 17 Zoom in. and when Vertical and Extension displays. click Pipe. for Detail Level.00 for Slope Angle. 19 In the Project Browser. and select the reducing wye fitting.

25 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. click Routing Solutions. 310 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and on the Options Bar. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the wye. 27 Select solution 2 of 2. select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. and press Delete. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. an elbow.24 Click Modify. 26 While pressing Ctrl. and another segment of pipe. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye).

29 On the Plumbing tab. 30 Move the cursor over the open leg of the reducing wye. specify 1200 for Offset. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. 32 Click Modify. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 311 . 33 Check slope and connectivity as described previously.28 Select the elbow created by the routing solution tool. and click Apply. and click the connector snap. 31 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. click the connector snap. (If necessary.36 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. use the Filter tool to select only piping. then down to connect with the sanitary main.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. running it inside the wall. 312 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. click the Training Files icon. “Refining the Urinal Lines” on page 312 to continue creating the plumbing system. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Plumbing to make it the active view. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping.) 3 Press Delete. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Urinal Waste Lines. and double-click 2 .

starting at the level of the original pipe. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. enter 300 for Offset. to a point in line with the center of the leftmost urinal. double-click 3D. and when the snap displays. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 11 Click Modify. press Tab until the Sanitary connection displays on the status bar at the bottom of the window. drag the preview to the left approximately 200. click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. and click Options. Refining the Urinal Lines | 313 .The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. specify 1. and move the cursor along the center line of the chase. 7 In the Layout Options dialog. click Draw Pipe. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 12 In the Project Browser. 10 Drag the preview over the urinal drain. specify 50 for D (diameter). 6 On the Options Bar.00 for Slope Angle. 9 On the Options Bar. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 300. 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. click once to specify the end of the pipe. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe.Plumbing to make it the active view. 8 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the end of the pipe.

and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector.00 for Slope Angle. 17 Click to specify the start of the pipe. and zoom in on the urinals. double-click 3D. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation properties of the existing pipe.Plumbing to make it the active view. verify that the slope is specified as 1. click Pipe. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Create Similar. Connect the remaining urinals 14 In the Project Browser. 23 Click to specify the start of the pipe. 24 Click Modify. 18 In the Layout Options dialog. and on the Options Bar. and click OK.Plumbing. click Options. and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. 314 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . double-click 2. 21 Right-click the section of pipe that you just added. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously. 19 Drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the middle urinal. 22 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe and the centerline snap for the rightmost urinal. 15 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the urinal. 16 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe above the middle urinal and the centerline snap for the urinal.13 Click the new pipe segments and check the slope. 20 Click Modify. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.

28 On the Options Bar. specify 80 for D (diameter).Resize pipes 26 In the Project Browser. 27 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. Refining the Urinal Lines | 315 . and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 100 mm segment) as shown. first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. specify 80 for D (diameter). and on the Options Bar. However. you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. Add a cleanout 29 Select the pipe between the 80 elbow and the left urinal. So. double-click 2 .Plumbing to make it the active view.

Plumbing to make it the active view. 33 Select the pipe to the urinal again. 316 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and in the Type Selector. click Pipe Fitting. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. specify 50 for D. Redefine fittings 34 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. and when the extension snap displays.30 Select the elbow. 36 Select the vertical pipe. select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. select M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee : Standard. 31 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 32 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. double-click 3D. click to place the plug on the tee. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. and select M_Pipe PVC DVW Bend : Standard. 35 In the Project Browser. Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe.

37 Click Modify. 40 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Adding Vents to the System | 317 . 39 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. “Adding Vents to the System” on page 317 to continue creating the plumbing system. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. 38 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping.

6 On the Options Bar. specify 0. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. and specify 2700 for Offset. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. click Options. 318 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Pipe. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described previously. click the Training Files icon. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. 4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. If necessary. click Pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click Apply. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You must move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. specify 50 for D (diameter). and click OK.rvt.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.00 for Slope Angle. Create additional vents 11 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and in the Type Selector. 7 In the Layout Options dialog. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment. 10 Click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee.

specify 50 for D (diameter). and click Apply. as shown.12 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Adding Vents to the System | 319 . use the Flip control to make the adjustment. click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. 15 Using the same method. 16 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping. place another vent between the two rightmost urinals. specify 2700 for Offset. 14 Click Modify.

right-click the connector at the open end. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. 18 Press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. An elbow is automatically placed at the joint. 25 Select the leftmost vent. A short section of pipe is added to the tee. 21 On the Plumbing tab of the Design Bar. and click the + control above it to change the elbow to a tee. and click Draw Pipe. 19 Drag the pipe preview toward the middle vent. right click the connector. 20 Select the elbow at the top of the middle vent pipe. 27 Continue dragging the preview to the open connector on the tee at the upper end of the middle vent. 320 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and click Modify. 22 Click the connector at the open leg of the tee to specify a starting point for the pipe. and click the connector at the open end of the middle vent to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 24 Select the tee and click the plus symbol to its left to change the tee to a cross. and click to specify the end point. specify 3000 for Offset.Connect the individual vents 17 Select the vertical vent between the 2 rightmost urinals. click Pipe. 23 On the Options Bar. click Draw Pipe. and in the Type Selector. and press Space. click Apply. 26 Drag the pipe preview a short distance.

specify 50 for D (diameter). 34 On the Options Bar. click Apply. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks. Adding Vents to the System | 321 . and on the Options Bar.28 Click Modify. 31 While pressing Ctrl. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. 30 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. and specify 2700 for Offset. click Pipe. 33 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Add a vent to the sinks 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. specify 50 for D (diameter). and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector.

while maintaining a 90 degree angle. 40 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Draw Pipe. right-click the connector at the open end. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 39 You can save the open file if you wish. “Create the Cold Water System” on page 323 to continue creating the plumbing system. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. 322 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.35 Click Modify. 38 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 37 Drag the pipe preview. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint. 36 Select the vent.

Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Cold Water Piping. expand Piping ➤ Conversion. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. specify M_Pipe Cross: M_Standard For Transition. click Rename. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. 15 Press F9 to open the System Browser. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. click Rename. in the right pane. click Branch. In the left pane of the Open dialog. specify M_Pipe Elbow : M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type.Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset. 4 Right-click Standard 3.Plumbing to make it the active view. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. and in the right pane. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. specify M_Pipe Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. and click Duplicate. and double-click 2 . in the right pane. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. click the Training Files icon. click Main. and press Enter. 11 In the left pane. 3 Right-click Standard 2. 16 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. enter Cold Water for the new name. 12 In the table. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. specify M_Pipe Straight Coupling: M_Standard Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 13 In the left panel. 5 Right-click Cold Water. right-click Standard. 9 In the table. and click Properties.rvt. and in the right pane. You now have the cold water piping at 2600 and the hot water piping at 2550. Create the Cold Water System | 323 . expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. specify M_Pipe Tee: M_Standard For Tap. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. specify None For Cross. which avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. Create the cold water system 14 In the Project Browser. enter Hot Water for the new name. 10 In the left pane. click Branch. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset. specify Tee For Tee. 2 Repeat the previous step to create another copy of Standard. and press Enter. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. click Main. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click View ➤ Piping. click Mechanical Settings.

select the domestic cold water connector. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. 26 On the Options Bar. click Options. 324 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and click to end the run as shown. 30 Select the middle sink in the view. verify that the slope is specified as 0. Create piping for the cold water system 21 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. 23 On the Options Bar. 19 While pressing Shift. and click OK. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. and on the Options Bar click (Filter). The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. and on the Options Bar. specify 750 for Offset.17 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 31 In the Select Connector dialog.00 for Slope Angle. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. 18 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. and click OK. click the floor drain. 24 In the Layout Options dialog. 29 Click Modify. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. and click to specify the end the segment. 20 On the Options Bar. click (Connect Into). the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. and in the Type Selector. click Pipe. The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. then select Plumbing Fixtures.

and click Apply. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. click to specify the end of the pipe. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. click the snap on the cold water pipe. 39 On the Plumbing tab. 33 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the 2 rightmost sinks. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. 40 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe just above the wall. 41 Drag the preview to the left. Create the Cold Water System | 325 . 35 On the Options Bar. 42 On the Options Bar. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. click Pipe. select the cold water pipe. 32 On the Plumbing tab. specify 2600 for Offset. 37 Zoom in on the area above the toilets. and click to end that segment. click Pipe. 36 Click Modify.) 38 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. 34 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown.A segment of pipe is added connecting the sink to the cold water system. drag the preview to the center of the wall behind the sinks. (If necessary. specify 600 for Offset.

double-click 3D. 47 Select the elbow behind the toilet. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. 45 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets. 48 On the Plumbing tab. and click the + control to change it to a tee.Plumbing. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 326 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .43 Click Modify. click Pipe. and then click the vertical cold water pipe. 46 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. select the rightmost toilet. 44 In the Project Browser.

50 Drag the preview to the left. 51 Click Modify. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. Create the Cold Water System | 327 . and click the horizontal cold water pipe Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and click to specify the endpoint behind the left toilet as shown. and click the vertical cold water pipe. 53 Select the rightmost urinal. 54 Use the same method to connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe. and on the Options Bar click . and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. and on the Options Bar click that you added to the tee. . 52 Select the leftmost toilet.49 Click the open connector on the tee.

F8. but leaving the branch to the urinals as is). 56 While pressing Shift. drag the cursor to spin the 3D Plumbing view to allow selecting the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. Adjust cold water pipe sizes 55 On the toolbar. The final steps in this exercise will adjust the size of several sections of the piping. specify 50 for D (diameter). feeding the toilets (including the tees. 58 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. 328 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 57 On the Options Bar. and then select the horizontal segments as shown.All of the cold water piping is in place. as shown. click (Dynamic Modify View) or enter the keyboard shortcut.

specify 40 for D (diameter). 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. specify 20 for D (diameter). 61 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink). 64 You can save the open file if you wish. 60 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. Create the Cold Water System | 329 .59 On the Options Bar. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 63 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 62 On the Options Bar.

10 Double-click M_Water Heater. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left. 330 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. select Plumbing Fixtures. 6 On the Options Bar. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing. and click View ➤ Piping. create the hot water system. select M_Water Heater : 40Gallon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. and zoom in on the sinks. 5 In the Filter dialog. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Hot Water Piping. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. and click to place the water heater as shown. click Check None. 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. click the title bar for the browser.rvt. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.rfa. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). click (Filter). 2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. click Plumbing Fixture. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click the Training Files icon. and in the Type Selector. double-click 2 . to the left of the main cold water pipe. “Create the Hot Water System” on page 330.

and click the main cold water pipe. 20 Select the water heater in the view. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. select Connector 2 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 20. click Add to System. 15 On the Options Bar. expand Domestic Hot Water. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. click (Connect Into). 17 In the System Browser. right-click the connector. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. and click Select. Create the Hot Water System | 331 . and click Finish System. expand Domestic Cold Water. and click Select. select the water heater in the view. and click Finish System. click (Edit System). 19 On the Edit System tab. click Draw Pipe. and on the Options Bar. select the water heater in the view. click Add to System. 16 On the Edit System tab. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. click (Edit System). 18 On the Options Bar.14 In the System Browser. The Edit System tab is activated on the Design Bar.

30 On the Options Bar. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and in the Type Selector. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. click Pipe. 27 Click Modify. select Pipe Types : Hot Water.23 On the Plumbing tab. and in the Type Selector. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. specify 800 for Offset. specify 2550 for Offset. 25 On the Options Bar. 332 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click when the hot water connector displays. 28 On the Plumbing tab. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. click Pipe. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click to specify the starting point for the pipe.

drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater.Plumbing. click Draw Pipe. 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown. Create the Hot Water System | 333 . 36 Right-click the open connector. and click the hot In this case. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. specify 800 for Offset. double-click 3D. and on the Options Bar. 40 In the Project Browser. and click to specify the end of the segment. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. 34 Select the middle sink in the view. 38 On the Options Bar. (Connect Into). 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. and click to end that segment. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click water pipe below the sinks. click Apply. 39 Click Modify. 33 Click Modify.31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe.

46 You can save the open file if you wish. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. and click. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. 47 Click File menu ➤ Close. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. double-click 2 . This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 44 In the Project Browser. click Pipe.41 On the Plumbing tab.Plumbing. 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. 43 Click Modify. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 334 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle.

you design a wet and dry fire protection system for an office building. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. 335 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. go to http://www.autodesk. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. However. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems.Fire Protection Systems 5 In this tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial datasets are not present. methodology. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. At the end of this tutorial. By following the recommended workflow. you will understand the process. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you can choose to save your work. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2008. As you create the systems.

Fire Prot view active. You will also draw the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. do the following: ■ ■ Create a level 1 floor plan view based on 1-Mech view. 4 With the 2 .Fire Prot for Name. This view is based on the 2 Mech view properties. During the fire protection design process. 6 Click OK.Mech. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. do the following: ■ ■ For Discipline. verify that Mechanical is selected. naming it 2 . manually modify the pipes and fittings. and click View Properties. right-click Copy of 2 . and size and tag the pipes. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. insert fittings. Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. TIP Working in different views for each discipline allows you to view only the system components for that discipline and makes system design more efficient. and create a new 3D view based on the 3D HVAC view. naming it 1 . you can then select that discipline or sub-discipline from the list. You create views and pipe types. Open the m Starting the Fire Protection Project. This new sub-discipline creates a Fire Protection view category in the Project Browser. Notice that the 2 Fire Prot view is now relocated under Fire Protection. you create views and pipe types.Fire Prot.Designing Fire Protection Systems Designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. enter Fire Protection. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new view called Copy of 2 . Next. you modify the view properties. Create new views 1 In the Project Browser.Ceiling Fire Prot. and finally. For Sub-Discipline. 3 Enter 2 . naming it 3D Fire Prot. Then. under Graphics. right-click the view named 2 .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. and click Rename. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.Ceiling Mech view. right-click in the drawing area. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Mech.Mech is created and becomes the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click the Training Files icon. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. ■ 336 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . TIP After you enter a discipline or sub-discipline for the first time. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. In this lesson. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and create a new ceiling plan view based on the 2 . and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 7 Using the method that you just learned. create schedules.

right-click the Design Bar. select Carbon Steel. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. Next. select Main. select Fire Protection Wet. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. 18 In the Type Selector. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. Next. In the Project Browser. Next. Configure pipe conversion settings 20 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. 17 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. 19 On the Design Bar. Next. 8 In the Project Browser. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 337 . click Duplicate. you create a pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. enter Fire Protection Wet. including the new material property. the command in progress terminates. and click Fire Protection. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. under Mechanical. 10 In the Type Selector. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and click OK. modify. Create new pipe types 9 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. for Material. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE You can also create. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. click (Properties). and click OK. click Mechanical Settings. click Edit/New. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. you create 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry systems. double-click the HVAC listing to collapse it because you will no longer use those views in this lesson. 23 Under System Type. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. or verify pipe types from the Project Browser. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. 14 For Name. 22 For System Type. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. click Pipe.Remember to specify Fire Protection for sub-discipline so that all views will be listed under Fire Protection in the Project Browser. right-click a pipe type and use the context menu. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you modify the pipe type properties. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 With the Type Properties dialog open. click Modify. TIP When you click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. You can also press Esc. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display.

27 Click OK. The room name and number display in a tooltip and on the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar). structural beams. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. or architecture.Fire Prot floor plan view to make it active. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. TIP If a view does not contain room tags. Draw the supply pipe 28 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 29 Enter ZR. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. and sketch a zoom region around Stairwell 30 (located in the lower-right corner of the building). the pipe main will be offset from level 2. you can easily identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component (indicated by 2 diagonal intersecting lines). Next. verify that 2750 is selected. double-click the 1 . duct. Notice that the cursor changes to a magnifying glass indicating that the Zoom tool is active. So. 338 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . For Offset. 26 Under System Type. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 25 For System Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views that you will be designing in. select Fire Protection Wet. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Branch. 24 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. However. For more information. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. NOTE Conversion settings are mechanical settings that are used when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. you begin the design by drawing the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. refer to Help. verify that 2750 is specified.■ For Offset.

30 On the View toolbar. select 150 mm. 33 On the Options Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. The new pipe displays. and click Apply to specify the pipe end point. and click in the approximate area to specify the pipe start point. 34 Place the cursor in the lower-left corner of the stairwell. NOTE The Thin Lines display is not saved during your design session. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 339 . do the following: ■ ■ For D. click (Thin Lines) to display the geometry in thin lines. enter 0. NOTE You can press Tab after specifying the Offset to confirm the value. For Offset. 32 In the Type Selector. You will need to reactivate it. click Pipe. enter 6400. This line thickness is used for plotting purposes giving the effect of line weights. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. for Offset. Thin Lines allows you to view the true thickness of lines relative to the zoom of the view. if you reopen Revit MEP.

First. As you place the sprinklers. and press Tab. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. you can choose to save your work. In this exercise. Finally. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset provided. you created new views and modified view properties. you verify the pipe geometry in the 3D view. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the rooms. using this information. use the Zoom. you do not need to type measurement symbols. you place the sprinklers. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. 340 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . just enter the value. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. you create a schedule to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. Notice that the supply pipe extends from the floor in level 1 into level 2. 38 On the View toolbar. you drew the supply pipe for fire protection systems. 40 If you want to save your work. IMPORTANT After finishing each exercise. 36 In the Project Browser. and click Save. The pipe geometry displays in 2 line and shaded allowing you to better see it. In the next exercise. double-click the 3D Fire Prot view. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600 mm. select Fine for Detail Level. Next. Then. and Spin buttons to verify that the supply pipe geometry is as you expected. 41 In the Save As dialog. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. 39 In the Dynamic View dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. click (Dynamically Modify View). However.TIP When entering a value. you place the wet system sprinklers and create a schedule. 37 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left of the drawing area). For example. and Shading w/ Edges for Model Graphics Style. Scroll. enter Starting the Fire Protection Project Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice.

1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and click Remove. enter Min. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required per room.1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 341 . do the following: ■ Under Category. and click Add. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. Open the m Placing Sprinklers. click the Training Files icon. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 4 While pressing Ctrl. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. For Formula. For Type. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 12. Click OK. To remove a field. Verify that Formula is selected. verify that Common is selected. enter Area/12. Create a calculated value parameter 7 Click Calculated Value. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. under Available fields. select Area. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 In the Calculated Value dialog. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Sprinklers. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 5 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. select it. click Schedule/Quantities. For Discipline. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. verify that Number is selected. select Rooms. 6 Select a field.1 square meters.

Click OK twice. select Level 2. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. 342 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . verify that (none) is selected. Next. Sprinklers. For Field formatting. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Then by. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project as if you had used the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice that only the data for the level 2 rooms displays. and double-click 2. 13 In the Format dialog. select 2 decimal places. select Number. Verify that equals is selected. The Min. A new view called Room Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. including spaces. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. 15 Enter ZR. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. Verify that Ascending is selected. verify that (none) is selected. select Level. For Rounding. Although you rounded the data to one decimal place. Organize the data 10 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine which rooms meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. For Units. Place a sprinkler 14 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per room data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements.NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. and sketch a zoom region around Office 6 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). select Fixed. select Min. Under Level. For And. sorted according to room number. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 rooms. You can change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. click Field Format. 9 Click OK.

you draw 2 reference lines to help you accurately place the sprinklers in the center of the ceiling tiles.Next. verify that Level : Level 2 is selected. 21 Draw the line diagonally to the opposite grid intersection. click to specify the line start point. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In the Type Selector. verify that Lines is selected. and after the intersection snap displays. click Lines. 16 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. This specifies Level 2 as the work plane for the reference lines. and specify Level : Level 2. For Plane. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 343 . 17 In the Work Plane dialog. ■ Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. under Specify a new Work Plane. click to specify the line end point. 18 Click OK. Verify that Chain and Radius are cleared. 20 Place the cursor at the ceiling grid intersection as shown. click Name. and after the intersection snap displays.

draw a second diagonal line that intersects the first at the center of the ceiling tile. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 344 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . However. You need to specify an underlay for this view to display the reference lines. under Graphics. Notice that the Lines tool remains active. 25 Using the same method. for Underlay.The line is created. a warning displays indicating that the line is not visible in the ceiling plan view. 24 Click OK. right-click in the drawing area. The line displays. 22 With the Lines tool active. and click View Properties. select Level 2.

click to place the sprinkler. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. place the cursor over the intersection of the 2 lines. 31 With the view zoomed. and after the mid point snap displays. 27 Zoom in on the lines to verify them. click Sprinkler. 28 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.26 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Line tool. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 345 . 30 On the Options Bar. you place a sprinkler. Next. select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent. 29 In the Type Selector.

This removes the Level 2 underlay from the ceiling plan view. Next. NOTE When placing sprinklers. Next. The sprinkler is centered in the ceiling tile. select the sprinkler that you placed. 37 On the Edit toolbar. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement in the ceiling tiles. The selected sprinkler displays in red. click both reference lines. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. you continue placing sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers 36 In the drawing area. 33 While pressing CTRL. click (Copy). and click OK. 346 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The underlay was used only to display the reference lines. 34 Right-click in the drawing area. you delete the reference lines. under Graphics. for Underlay. and click View Properties. You use this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. and then press Delete.32 Click Modify on the Design Bar. select None. you delete the reference lines. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. Next.

A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. Notice that the copy selection border follows the cursor. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. 41 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown.Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and after the intersection snap displays. 38 On the Options Bar. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. click to specify the copy end point. 39 Zoom out so that the entire Office 6 ceiling grid is visible. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. and after the intersection snap displays. 40 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 347 . and that Copy is selected. click to specify the copy start point.

You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). 44 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 6. and select Multiple. 45 On the Edit toolbar. and sketch a zoom region around Office 7 (located immediately below Office 6). you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. Next. click to specify the copy start point. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 7. 46 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. click (Copy). This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. and after the intersection snap displays. 348 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Copy and array sprinklers 42 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 43 Enter ZR. 47 In Office 6. verify that Copy is selected. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection.

specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 349 .48 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 7. and after the intersection snap displays.

and after the intersection snap displays. 350 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .49 Move the cursor directly down. specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler.

then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). you array the other Office 7 sprinklers. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. select Last.The sprinklers are placed. because all of the sprinklers in Office 7 are equally spaced. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. you can use the Array tool to finish the job. click (Array). Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 351 . Furthermore. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). 50 On the Design Bar. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. 51 While pressing CTRL. 53 On the Options Bar. creating an array is a 2-step process. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 7. Next. For Move To. NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. to specify array end point. it is an ideal situation to use an array. You first specify an array start point. Verify that Constrain is cleared. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. click Modify. 52 On the Edit toolbar. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array.

and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the array start point.54 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 7 sprinkler. click to specify the array end point as shown. Notice that an outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. 352 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and after the intersection snap displays. 55 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 353 . Next.The Office 7 sprinklers are placed. you place sprinklers in Office 8. 56 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.

Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected. 58 On the Options Bar. Notice that all elements in the 2 .57 Starting outside the upper-left corner of the building. drag the cursor to the lower-right. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. and click OK. click Check None. select Sprinklers. 354 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 59 In the Filter dialog. and draw a pick box around Office 6.

you can clear it by filtering. or by pressing SHIFT and selecting the component. 62 Using the mouse scroll wheel.The Office 6 sprinklers are selected. click to specify the copy start point. and after the mid point snap displays. you are selecting all components that are visible in the active view (within the view range). If the selection contains an unwanted component. by cross-picking (drag right to left). or by selecting individual components. adjust the view so that you can see both Office 6 and Office 8. IMPORTANT When selecting components either by drawing a pick box (drag left to right). Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 355 . 61 On the Options Bar. 63 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. 60 On the Edit toolbar. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. clear Multiple. click (Copy).

click to specify the copy end point. and after the mid point snap displays. enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps. NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap. 356 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .64 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 8.

67 On the Edit toolbar. Next. click (Copy). click to specify the copy end point at the ceiling grid intersection. Open 2. you place sprinklers in the large common space. You copy this sprinkler to Open 2 and use it to create a sprinkler array. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 65 Zoom to show Office 8 and the part of the adjacent common area. Open 2. verify that Multiple is cleared. Remember to watch for the intersection snap. 69 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. 68 On the Options Bar.You have now placed the sprinklers for the 3 offices. and after the intersection snap displays. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 357 . 66 Select the lower-right Office 8 sprinkler. 70 Move the cursor to the right into Open 2 as shown.

73 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. For Number. 72 On the Edit toolbar. You could copy sprinklers. For Move To. Next. enter 6 for the number of arrays. but creating an array is quicker. Verify that Constrain is cleared. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. 71 Select the sprinkler that you copied. click (Array).The Office 8 sprinkler is copied to Open 2. 358 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 74 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 2. select 2nd.

For more information about arrays. and after the intersection snap displays. If you make a mistake placing the array. The array is created. you create multiple arrays based on this array. select all Open 2 sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 359 . IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. Notice that 4 arrays were created after the end point. click to specify the array end point as shown. This indicated that the specified end point would be the placement location for the second array. This is because 2nd was selected for Move To on the Options Bar. refer to Help. Next.75 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. 76 While pressing CTRL. undo the step and try again. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. Zoom out to display the array.

verify that 2nd is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. 77 On the Edit toolbar. 80 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. click to specify end point for the second array. and after the intersection snap displays. For Number.If you need to remove an object from a selection. select the object to remove while pressing SHIFT. 79 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler that is within the array selection. For Move To. Verify that Constrain is cleared. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. enter 4 for number of arrays. 360 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 78 On the Options Bar. click (Array).

select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. you need to load them in the project. Load a new sprinkler family 82 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 84 Open the M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. The sprinkler family loads into the project. Because this room does not have a ceiling.rfa file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder. However. Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 2 is complete Next. To modify a family type. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). you place sprinklers in the Mechanical/Electrical room. click the Training Files icon. click Delete Element(s) to delete the 3 sprinklers.The arrays are created. 83 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit Family on the Options Bar. first. you will use non-hosted sprinklers. 81 In the Revit MEP 2008 dialog. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 361 .

88 In the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room. 93 On the Options Bar. You can also use the Mirror tool to place the left sprinkler by drawing a mirror axis at the mid point of the top and bottom walls of the Mechanical/Electrical room. 87 In the Type Selector. move the cursor toward the right wall. select M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted : 15mm Upright. and notice that the sprinklers display in the Mechanical/Electrical room. and while pressing CTRL. A warning may display informing you that the sprinkler is not visible in the ceiling plan view. This occurred because the sprinkler offset elevations are beyond the view range of the active ceiling view. click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the right wall.Place non-hosted sprinklers 85 With the 2-Ceiling Fire Prot view active. and using the listening dimensions for reference. and notice that the temporary dimensions reference the right wall. select both sprinklers. You can also right-click. 362 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 90 Press the Spacebar to change the listening dimension reference to the left wall. Next. enter 2900 mm. You address this warning after placing the other sprinkler. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. double-click 2 . and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). 94 In the Element Properties dialog. you change the sprinkler offsets. 95 In the Project Browser. and click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the left wall. under Constraints. and click OK. This specifies the elevation for the selected sprinklers. enter ZR. Notice that the Mechanical/Electrical room sprinklers do not display.Fire Prot to make it the active view. click Sprinkler. and click Element Properties from the context menu. 89 Move the cursor near the left wall. 92 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room. 91 In the Project Browser. click (Properties). for Offset. 86 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.Ceiling Fire Prot. and double-click 2 .

Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. Remember to click to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. and click Save. In this exercise. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. 97 If you want to save your work. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. navigate to the folder of your choice. You placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 363 . click File menu ➤ Save. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers.Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 96 Using the placement methods that you have learned. 98 In the Save As dialog. you created a room schedule to calculate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each room based on the building specifications and the fire protection code. Remember to always round decimals up to the next whole number. Use sprinkler type: M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent for all rooms. enter Placing Sprinklers Training for File name.

piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. In the next exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Fire Protection Wet system category located in the Unassigned folder. If the System Browser does not respond. if all system components are assigned. you also convert and place pipe fittings. click System Browser. click the Training Files icon. Empty Default system categories do not display in the System Browser. 364 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Unlike logical connections (systems). TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. During this exercise. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click in the drawing area to make it active. and double-click 2 . However. a Default system category would not contain any system components. it would be considered empty. modify pipe branches. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. All system components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. the assigned sprinklers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. You assign a system component (such as mechanical equipment. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. then press F9. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components (piping is not considered a system). 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. and use the System Browser to confirm your systems. Thus. Open the m Connecting Sprinklers. So. and physically with piping. and expand the Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. sprinklers. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. you create a system and piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. After creating the logical connection.Fire Prot to make it the active view. As you assign sprinklers to systems. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. after you placed the sprinklers.

select Sprinklers. click Check None. 6 On the Options Bar. Connecting the Sprinklers | 365 . click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. and click OK.Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 8 and Office 28. Notice that all elements within the 2 .Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. 7 In the Filter box.

and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Notice that after you click . IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Wet 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. After you assign the remaining sprinklers. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. the system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected and display in red. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. Notice that the Default Fire Protection Wet system category no longer contains these sprinklers because you have assigned them to a system. Note that this display indicates that the new system is selected. and will be considered empty. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. the default system category will not contain any sprinklers. 366 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. 8 On the Options Bar.

click Layout Path on the Options Bar. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. and click Select. You can also right-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 listing in the System Browser. You want the Network layout solution because it connects the sprinklers to a central main. After placing a system component. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Remember that systems can be created before or after creating pipe is drawn. expand Piping. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Click (Next Solution). do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. The Layout Path tools are provided on the Design Bar and Options Bar. NOTE You do not need to select a system or have system components connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool. and click Select to select the system. and select solution 2. right-click Fire Protection Wet.Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. press Tab. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. verify that Solutions is selected. you can a system component to access the Layout Path on the Options Bar. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. and select the system. ■ You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys. The main will connect to the supply pipe in the stairwell. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. This listing represent the system that you just created. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. Connect the sprinklers with piping 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. Next. place the cursor over a sprinkler. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Connecting the Sprinklers | 367 . The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection.

18 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that 2750. structural beams. Next. duct.0 is specified. You use pipe conversion settings to convert the layout path to physical piping. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2. 20 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 15 On the Options Bar. select Branch. A drag control displays. 22 Zoom in on the vertical main. For Offset. you modify the layout path. 19 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. click Settings. 17 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet.Next. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. click Modify. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Modify the layout path 21 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. verify that Main is selected. or architecture. 368 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . You now modify the vertical main layout that will be the main pipe. 23 Select the vertical layout path segment.

click Finish Layout.24 Using the drag control. drag the main to the left as shown. 25 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Connecting the Sprinklers | 369 .

and the system remains. double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view. select a different layout solution. or that offset elevations are incorrect. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser.The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. Notice that all of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. Either relocate the system components. Next. You can delete pipes and pipe fittings. and are not part of the system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 27 Enter VG. 370 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. You hide these elements to allow you to easily snap to the sprinklers and the pipe. This is because they constitute a physical rather than a logical connection. Modify the pipe runs 26 In the Project Browser. Always check pipe connectivity after modification. Notice that the cursor snaps to various building elements in the 3D view. or manually modify the pipe. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. you modify the pipe run to consolidate the branch lines and simplify the design. under Fire Protection ➤ 3D Views.

29 Click OK. enter ZR. Ceilings. Stairs. Rooms. and draw a zoom region around the Office 8 sprinkler. and after it highlights.28 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. press TAB to highlight the branch pipe and sprinkler. Under Visibility. The building elements are hidden. Walls. Floors. Lines. Roofs. Doors. and click to select them. do the following: ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. The selected pipe and sprinkler display in red. 31 With the pipe and sprinkler selected. Railings. clear Casework. 30 Zoom in and place the cursor over the branch pipe that services the Office 8 sprinkler. and Windows. Connecting the Sprinklers | 371 .

34 Enter ZF. the logical (system) connection is still intact. and draw a zoom region around the Open 2 sprinkler (located to the lower-right of the Office 8 sprinkler. select the sprinkler to remove it from the selection. 33 Press Delete to delete the selected elements. Remember that although the physical (pipe) connection to the sprinkler has been deleted. 35 Enter ZR. The Office 8 sprinkler is shown circled). to zoom out the view to fit the window. 372 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .32 While pressing SHIFT.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 373 . you convert the elbow fitting at the end of the branch in order to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to it. Notice that 2 plus signs display. 37 Click the plus sign on the right. These are fitting conversion controls which allow you to convert the elbow fitting to a tee fitting in either a vertical or horizontal orientation. You may need to zoom in closer to better see the fitting conversion controls.Next. Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting. These controls convert the fitting to the next possible fitting type for the piping context. Convert a fitting 36 Select the elbow fitting at the end of the branch above the sprinkler.

The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation. 374 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting. A minus sign displays. 38 Select the tee fitting.

a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting. 40 Select the elbow fitting. and click the left plus sign. Connecting the Sprinklers | 375 .TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control. 39 Click the minus sign to convert the tee back to the elbow fitting.

When drawing pipe. pipe fittings. zoom out the view so that the tee fitting and the Office 8 sprinkler are visible. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. If you pause briefly. . 42 Place the cursor over the open end of the tee fitting. Connect the Office 8 sprinkler 41 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. you draw the pipe to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to the branch. or equipments. NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to pipe. if a connector snap does not display. When connecting pipe to some elements. . and after the end point snap displays. use the connector snap.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. click to specify the pipe start point. such as pipe fittings and equipment in a 3D view. to quickly and accurately locate a connector. click Pipe. 43 Using the mouse scroll wheel. use the end point snap. 376 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Next. 44 Begin to draw the pipe diagonally to the upper-left pipe along the same axis as the existing pipe and toward the Office 8 sprinkler. Notice that the pipe diameter is larger than the existing pipe.

and as the listening dimensions display. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. This automatically sets the pipe diameter or width and height. TIP When drawing pipe. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing pipe. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected. press the Spacebar after you specify the start point and move the cursor to begin drawing pipe.45 Press the Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and offset values to those of the tee fitting. 46 In the Type Selector. Connecting the Sprinklers | 377 . Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the pipe type. and the offset parameter to match those of the selected connector. 47 Continue to draw the pipe. enter 300 and press Enter to specify the length of the pipe segment. You should always verify the pipe type from the Type Selector on the Options Bar.

The sprinkler connects into the pipe. and select the pipe segment that you just drew. and after the pipe segment highlights. you check the connectivity of the pipe branch to make certain everything is connected and validate the pipe geometry. 49 Select the Office 8 sprinkler. 48 Click Modify on the Design Bar. place the cursor over the pipe branch that you modified. Check connectivity and validate geometry 51 In the 3D view. 50 On the Options Bar. Notice that all pipe fittings are automatically added. 378 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Next.The pipe segment is created. press Tab 3 times. click (Connect Into).

then you know that a disconnect exists. 52 Using the same method. zoom in on the pipe and fittings. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. and verify that the physical pipe geometry is as expected. Typically a disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make a connection.The pipe branch including the sprinklers and the pipe fittings highlight. Next. press TAB the required number of times. indicating that they are physically connected. When pipes and fittings are connected. The lower section of the pipe run displays in red. After the pipe run and sprinklers highlight. IMPORTANT Understanding TAB behavior is very important when designing piping systems in Revit MEP. check the connectivity in the 2 -Fire Prot floor plan view. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. you can check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. allowing you to better see the connections. 53 In the 3D Fire Prot view. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. or you can use the Trim (Extend) tool. To use the TAB behavior for selecting highlighted objects. and equipment. If the entire network does not highlight. you can click to select them. click to select them. you validate the piping geometry. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. fittings. The first time you press Tab. Connecting the Sprinklers | 379 . and after the objects highlight.

and after it highlights. click . and click OK. This clears the Office 28 sprinkler from the selection. under Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 57 In the Filter dialog. The pipe branch and fittings are deleted. 56 On the Options Bar.Fire Prot to make it the active view. 58 Place the cursor over the selected pipe run. 380 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . right-click. and click Delete. 55 Zoom the view and draw a pick box (drag left to right) around the upper-right pipe branch (include fittings and sprinkler) that services Office 28. double-click 2 . clear Sprinklers.Continue pipe branch modification 54 In the Project Browser.

place the cursor over the lower-left Office 29 sprinkler. select the highlighted pipe branch. Connecting the Sprinklers | 381 . and click OK. and after it highlights. 60 Click to select the branch. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch. including the pipe fittings and the upper 2 Office 29 sprinklers. 62 While pressing CTRL. 63 On the Options Bar. clear Sprinklers.59 Place the cursor over the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch. click . including the pipe fittings and lower Office 29 sprinklers. 61 With the branch selected. and after it highlights. 64 In the Filter dialog. Both selected branches display in red.

and click OK. 67 On the Options Bar. Notice that only the pipes and pipe fittings are selected. 382 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 65 Press Delete to delete the 2 pipe branches including the pipe fittings.This clears the Office 29 sprinklers from the selection. clear Sprinklers. you need to delete the pipes connected to the upper-right Open 2 sprinklers. 69 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings. Next. Next. 66 Draw a pick box around the 2 upper-right sprinklers in Open 2. you draw pipe to connect a sprinkler. click . 68 In the Filter dialog.

and click Draw Pipe. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected in the Type Selector. select the upper-right pipe branch to display the pipe segment connector. 74 Draw the pipe down toward the sprinkler. Connecting the Sprinklers | 383 . 73 Zoom the view. click to connect to the sprinkler. and after the connector snap displays over the sprinkler. click to specify the first pipe segment end point. All other pipe properties match those of the selected connector. and draw the pipe to the right toward the upper-right Office 29 sprinkler. and after the centerline snap displays. 71 Right-click the connector located on the right end of the pipe.70 In Open 2. 72 In the Type Selector. 75 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool.

78 Using the same method. 76 Select the lower Office 28 sprinkler (located above Office 29). and press TAB twice. 384 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click (Connect Into). you check connectivity. you connect 2 more office sprinklers to the branch. and select the pipe segment that you just drew. The Office 28 and Office 29 sprinklers are connected to the branch.The upper-right Office 29 sprinkler is connected. 77 On the Options Bar. Next. Next. The sprinkler connects into the pipe and all pipe fittings are automatically added. 79 Place the cursor over the horizontal pipe branch. connect the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler.

However. Modify the pipe main 83 Place the cursor over the branch that services the lower Office 29 sprinklers. Connecting the Sprinklers | 385 .The entire pipe branch highlights. you make additional pipe modifications. notice that the 2 sprinklers in Open 2 do not highlight. connect the 2 lower Office 29 sprinklers to the pipe branch located on the left. and after it highlights. You need to connect these sprinklers. The branch including the Open 2 and office sprinklers highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Next. 82 Using the pipe branch modification methods that you learned. press TAB twice. These sprinklers are not physically connected. Remember to delete the end pipe segment before drawing pipe. and then click to select the highlighted objects. 81 Check connectivity. 80 Use to connect each of the Open 2 sprinklers to the branch. This indicates that the branch and office sprinklers are connected. including sprinklers and pipe fittings.

The highlighted objects display in red. These disconnects resulted from deleting the 2 tee fittings that connected the branches to the main.The connected main. Notice that the highlighting stops at 2 areas along the main pipe. the connection continues to display for easy reference. 386 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . TIP After using TAB to check connectivity. branch. and sprinklers display in red. These branches were deleted during branch consolidation. 84 Enter ZR. You need to resolve the disconnects. 85 Select the upper pipe segment to display the 2 pipe connectors. This indicates 2 disconnects. you can click to select all highlighted objects. and after the connector snap displays. release the mouse button to connect the 2 pipe segments. 86 Drag the lower pipe connector down over the end of the lower pipe segment. making them easier to view. and draw a zoom region around both disconnects. If you move the cursor.

you use the Trim tool to resolve the disconnect.TIP When dragging a pipe connector. notice that cursor changes to a pencil indicating that the Draw tool is active. Connecting the Sprinklers | 387 . 88 On the Options Bar. 87 Zoom in on the lower disconnect. NOTE Trim/Extend is a 2-click process. click (Trim/Extend). Notice that the cursor changes indicating that the Trim/Extend tool is active. select the object as the trim/extend start point. 90 Select the pipe segment below the disconnect as the extend end point. As always. You can also enter TR to activate the Trim/Extend tool. 89 Select the pipe segment above the disconnect as the extend start point. Instead of dragging the pipe connector. or in resolving disconnects. Trim/Extend is especially useful in modifying pipe and duct. use TAB to check connectivity after making any modifications to pipe. First. then select the object as the trim/extend end point.

The main and branches highlight. indicating that they are connected. 91 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 93 Check connectivity. 92 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Next. 388 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you tile 2 views and modify the lower end of the pipe run.The 2 pipe segments connect.

This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. 95 With the 2 . and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view.Work in 2 views simultaneously 94 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. the active view is the only open window. Notice that all pipe fittings display in their symbolic representation when you are viewing pipes in coarse or medium (single line) Detail Level. Note that if this option is unavailable. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 98 Enter WT to tile both windows. Connecting the Sprinklers | 389 . the active view is tiled to the left. 96 In the Project Browser.Fire Prot to make it the active view. and draw a zoom region around the elbow fitting at the lower end of the main. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. TIP When you tile 2 views. you tile 2 views to work in them simultaneously. enter ZR. Next. including the sprinkler to the right. 97 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan : 2 . You will work in the floor plan view and validate the geometry in the 3D view.Fire Prot view active. 99 Adjust the view in both windows to view the elbow fitting and the left sprinkler as shown.

Remember to zoom the view to better see the fitting conversion controls. 103 In the Type Selector. and after the mid point snap displays. This symbolic representation is exaggerated and is larger than the actual fitting size. convert the elbow to a tee with a vertical orientation. you can change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe or turn off component visibility or filter objects in the Visibility Graphics dialog. select Fine for Detail Level. click to place the endcap. This endcap will provide pipeline cleanout access. click Pipe Fitting.NOTE When you are viewing pipes in single line display (coarse or medium Detail Level). Changing the Detail Level to Fine (2 line) will display the fittings in their actual size. 101 On the View Control Bar located at the lower left of the drawing area. 390 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 104 Zoom in on the tee. you place an endcap on the tee. select the elbow.Fire Prot view. select M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. and using the fitting conversion method that you learned earlier. all pipe fittings display in their symbolic form. When snapping to fittings in single line Detail Level. especially when symbolic fittings are displayed. you change the view detail level to display pipes in 2 line. 100 In the 2 . You should always zoom in on the fitting when working with a fitting. Next. The pipe geometry displays in 2 line. 105 Move the cursor over the end of the open end of the tee fitting. it is important to remember that the fitting connectors are located in the actual location of the fitting and not in the end of the symbolic representation. 102 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. First.

press TAB once. and after it highlights. The endcap and tee fittings highlight indicating that they are connected. 108 In the 3D Fire Prot view.106 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 107 Place the cursor over the endcap. Connecting the Sprinklers | 391 . validate the endcap geometry.

However. As stated earlier in this exercise. Next. in single line display. You can also select the sprinkler while pressing SHIFT to clear it from the selection. you modify the sprinkler branch connection. 111 In the 3D Fire Prot view. 110 Adjust the floor plan and 3D views to view the sprinkler that is located to the right of the tee and endcap.109 In the 2 . all fittings and other elements are represented in their symbolic form. 113 In the Filter dialog. 112 On the Options Bar. clear Sprinklers. Notice that the endcap displays as centered in the tee fitting. 392 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The sprinkler. The pipes and fittings display in single line. use the View Control Bar to change the view detail level to Medium.Fire Prot view. and click OK. 114 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings. draw a pick box around the sprinkler and the connecting pipe branch. pipe. and pipe fittings display in red. So. this tee fitting endcap is connected to the tee connector. their connectors are located in their actual location. click .

and all pipe fittings are automatically added.115 Select the sprinkler.Fire Prot view. 118 Drag the right pipe segment connector to the right. 116 On the Options Bar. 117 In the 2 . The sprinkler connects into the pipe. Connecting the Sprinklers | 393 . click . You need to resolve the disconnect. and after the connector snap displays. and select the right pipe segment above the sprinkler. zoom in and select the left pipe segment. release the mouse button to reconnect the pipe branch.

Remove a pipe segment 119 In the 2 . Watch for the end point snap as you drag the pipe segment. You resolved the disconnect. You will check connectivity later in this exercise. Next. you remove the pipe above Server Room 32. zoom out and locate the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32 (located to the left of Conference Room 31). notice that the wet pipe segment is located over this room. However.Fire Prot view. You can also snap to the end point of the tee fitting to connect the pipe. 394 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . You can validate the geometry in the 3D view.Note that the end of the right pipe segment (and its connector) might be located in the symbolic fitting. The dry fire protection system will service the server room. You need to remove this pipe segment to follow good design practice. 120 Select the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32. and press Delete.

Remember to zoom the view to locate the fitting conversion control. You will close the right end when you finish modifying the lower section of the wet system pipe run.You will reconnect the Conference Room 31 sprinklers when you later finish this pipe run. 121 Enter ZR. This closes the left pipe segment end. 123 Zoom out. convert the tee to an elbow. Connecting the Sprinklers | 395 . and check connectivity. 122 Using the conversion methods that you learned. and draw a zoom region around the sprinkler that you recently modified. you need to convert a sprinkler tee fitting to an elbow in order to close the pipe connection. Next.

you connect the lower conference room sprinklers. validate the pipe geometry. Next.Notice that the lower conference room sprinklers are not connected. Finish modifying the lower section of the pipe run 125 Using the methods that you learned. 396 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 124 In the 3D view. finish consolidating the branches that service Conference Room 31 (located at the lower-right corner of the building) as shown. You connect these after you validate the pipe geometry.

Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 131 On the Options Bar. 129 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. close the 3D Fire Prot view. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. Next. verify that 30 is specified. Connecting the Sprinklers | 397 . and maximize the 2 . and number of elements in the system. check connectivity. verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. such as VAV boxes. and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. 128 In the 2 .Fire Prot view.Fire Prot view. system equipment. mechanical equipment. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and pipe or duct is created. boilers. Connect the upper section of the level 2 wet system 127 If the windows are tiled. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For System Name. you can select the pipe or duct.Remember to resolve disconnects. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. select a pipe segment. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). verify that None is specified. air terminals. and AC units. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. or sprinkler that is connected to the current wet system. radiators. 130 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. click Add To System. For System Equipment. For Number of Elements. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and so on) are logically connected by a system. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). fitting. 126 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Select Multiple. and then you create piping to physically connect them.

The selected sprinklers display in red. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. 133 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. click Finish. You cannot select them. click Finish System. Notice that the Options Bar now reports that there are 66 Number of Elements (sprinklers) in the system. 134 On the Options Bar. 135 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 398 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. 132 Place the cursor outside Office 6 in the upper-left corner of the building.

and press TAB once to confirm the upper half of the system. right-click Fire Protection Wet. and click Expand All. 137 With the cursor over the sprinkler. 139 Under Systems. Connecting the Sprinklers | 399 . Next. 138 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.Confirm the level 2 wet system 136 In the 2 _Fire Prot view. and click Select. press TAB twice to confirm the entire system. This is because you assigned all of the sprinklers that you had placed to a system. 140 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. place the cursor over a newly added sprinkler. Also notice that the Unassigned folder is not listed. click System Browser. expand Piping. Notice that all of the sprinklers have been assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system. you confirm the system in the System Browser. Notice that the upper section of the system connects to the lower section.

do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Click . and select solution 5. Create piping for upper section of the wet system 141 Click Modify on the Design Bar. select any system component to access Layout Path on the Options Bar. you physically connect these sprinklers with piping. ■ 400 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . verify that Solutions is selected. you are confirming the logical connection between system elements. The newly added sprinklers are logically connected. Next. 143 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. After placing system components. 144 On the Options Bar. and select a newly added sprinkler. The Layout Path tool activates. TIP You do not need to select a system or have system elements (such as sprinklers) logically connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool.The logical connection displays in red confirming the level 2 wet system. not piping which is the physical connection. 142 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. NOTE Remember that when you confirm systems.

149 Verify that the pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch as for Main. 150 Click OK. 145 On the Options Bar. select Branch. click Finish Layout.0 is specified. 147 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet.The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2. 146 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Notice that the main connects to the open end of the cross fitting. Next. 151 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. as there is a vertical main and horizontal branches. The selected solution is consistent with the design of the existing pipe run. You now verify the conversion settings that you specified in an earlier exercise. For Offset. Connecting the Sprinklers | 401 . you verify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a physical pipe run. click Settings. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. verify that Main is selected. verify that 2750. 148 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

this is because the pipe run (most likely the main) is disconnected. You will resolve these disconnects when you consolidate the branches. and validate the geometry. modify the upper pipe run to consolidate the branches and simplify the piping design according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ ■ Use Pipe Type : Fire Protection Wet. check connectivity. Remember to resolve disconnects. and place an endcap on the cross fitting at the top end of the main. 402 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . If a No auto-route solution found warning displays after you create the pipe run. This pipe run physically connects the upper wet system sprinklers to the lower wet system sprinklers at the cross fitting. Next. Complete the level 2 wet system pipe run 152 Using the methods that you learned on the lower pipe run. Use M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. you complete the pipe run.The fire protection pipe geometry (main and branches) is created.

After creating the system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. 4 On the Edit toolbar. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. click (Copy). TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. and draw a zoom region around Server Room 32. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 154 In the Save As dialog. you used various methods to modify pipe segments to bring the system design more in line with the specifications. Open the m Creating the Dry System. you create the dry fire protection system.You have completed the level 2 fire protection wet system. 1 In the Project Browser. 153 If you want to save your work. You also converted pipe fittings and placed endcap fittings. and pipe geometry was confirmed in the 3D view. In the next exercise. 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 33. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. Finally. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. enter Connecting the Sprinklers Training for File name. and click Save. As with the wet system. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 32. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 403 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Place sprinklers 2 Enter ZR. and double-click 2 . Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. click the Training Files icon. click File menu ➤ Save. Connectivity was checked. The pipes in this system do not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice.

5 On the Options Bar. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. 7 Move the cursor to the right along the same horizontal ceiling grid and into the Server Room 32. 404 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy start point. click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. Verify that Copy is selected. 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. 8 Move the cursor diagonally to the upper-left. and after the intersection snap displays.

The System Browser opens. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 405 . you create the dry system to logically connect the 2 sprinklers. Next. You can also turn off snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. while pressing CTRL. you change the sprinkler type. select both Server Room 32 sprinklers.9 Click Modify. The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. 10 While pressing CTRL. 13 Under Systems. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. click System Browser. select M_Sprinkler-Dry_Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Dry Pendent. Next. select both sprinklers. 11 In the Type Selector. Create the dry system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the drawing area. Expand Unassigned to view the 2 dry sprinklers that you placed.

and for each sprinkler. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Next. 18 Expand Fire Protection Dry 1. 25 In the Layout Options dialog. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. Create the dry system pipe run 19 In the Project Browser. and the Default Fire Protection Dry system category is considered empty. you can view system information including flow. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. and click Select. The sprinklers are logically connected. Each selected sprinkler displays in red. 17 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category. click Options. Confirm and validate the system 16 In the System Browser. 23 On the Options Bar. double-click 2 . you create the pipe run to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Select The selected system displays in red.0 is specified. 22 In the Type Selector. click Pipe. (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign Notice that after you click . 406 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . enter 0. 26 Place the cursor outside Office 33 and over the vertical main pipe that services the wet system. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). for Slope Angle. IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Dry 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Dry in the Piping folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and so on. 20 Zoom in on Server Room 32. and after the intersection snap displays.Fire Prot to make it the active view. Next. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. This indicates that you have assigned all of the dry sprinklers to a system. Verify that Auto Connect is selected.15. and click OK. verify that 15mm is selected. click the sprinklers to it. You have confirmed and validated the system. Notice that the Default Fire Protection Dry system category no longer displays. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. verify that 2750.15 On the Options Bar. For Offset. sprinkler size. 21 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. right-click. 24 On the Options Bar. This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. the dry system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. In the System Browser.

and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. Next. Watch for the centerline and connector snaps. Notice that the pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper Server Room 32 sprinkler. click . 30 On the Options Bar. and connect to the lower sprinkler as shown. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. 29 Select the unconnected Server Room 32 sprinkler. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 407 .27 Draw the pipe run to the right. You can confirm this in the 3D Fire Prot view or by checking connectivity. 28 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool.

expand 3D views. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. 33 Zoom in on Server Room 32. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. You can click the slope control to change the slope direction. 35 Zoom in on the pipe to validate that the pipe geometry is as expected. and double-click 3D Fire Prot. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. 38 On the Options Bar. 36 Select the vertical main pipe. Notice that the slope displays next to the slope control. To follow good design practice. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 32 In the Project Browser. 37 On the Edit toolbar. 408 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . indicating that they are connected.The sprinkler connects into the pipe. click (Create Similar). you check connectivity and validate the pipe geometry. 34 Place the cursor over a pipe segment. and press TAB 3 times. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. under Fire Protection. Next. Next. 31 Zoom the view. click Options. you connect the fire protection system pipe run to the supply pipe.

In this exercise. . Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. Click OK. This adds the Count field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. enter Creating the Dry System Training for File name. select Family and Type. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 32. Notice that you did not need to verify the pipe type because Create Similar matches the connector parameters and the type of the selected object. enter 0. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 4 Under Available fields. for Slope Angle. do the following: ■ Under Category. IMPORTANT When drawing pipe either by using the Pipe draw tool on the Design Bar. 1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Then. In this case. select Count. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. This clears the slope. always verify that the pipe type is correct in the Type Selector. and click Save.39 In the Layout Options dialog. 42 Check connectivity. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. click Schedule/Quantities. if you use the Create Similar tool. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. After the system was completed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. checked pipe connectivity.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. navigate to the folder of your choice. under Available fields. You have completed the dry fire protection system. and click OK. First. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. 40 Zoom in on the supply pipe located in Stairwell 30. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. draw the pipe to the left and connect it to the main as shown. Additionally. select Sprinklers. click the Training Files icon. and in the 3D view validate the pipe geometry. then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 409 . and click Add to add the field to the list. However. the pipe type and other properties match the vertical main that you selected. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 43 In the Save As dialog. you connected the fire protection pipe run to the supply pipe that provides water to the fire protection system. Open the m Modifying Pipe Diameters. This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create pipe. you placed dry system sprinklers. 41 Using the methods that you learned when consolidating branches. or by right-clicking a connector. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. and click Add.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. For Then by.If you need to remove a field from the list. You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Notice that only the data for the level 2 sprinklers displays. You can refer to this sprinkler total as you modify the pipe diameters in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. select it. There is a grand total of 68 sprinklers on level 2.Fire Prot to make the view active. 8 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and click Remove. 11 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. Tile the views 7 In the Project Browser. select Family and Type. you specify how the data will be organized in the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 9 In the Project Browser. Organize the data 6 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you tile the floor plan and 3D views. Note that this option is not available if the active view is the only open window. 5 Select a field. TIP When you tile 2 views. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. You may need to drag the column dividers to modify the column width. Select Grand totals. and that it is sorted according to family and type. 10 Enter WT to tile both windows. Next. and double-click 2. Verify that Ascending is selected. Next. and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make the view active. Click OK twice. and clear Itemize every instance. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ Count Family and Type Next. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. you modify the pipe diameters. verify that (none) is selected. A new view called Sprinkler Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. the active view is tiled to the left. 410 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

click .Fire Prot view. or height. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. select the supply pipe in the stairwell to remove it from the selection. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 411 . This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. width. starting at the upper-left corner of the building.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. Changing the diameter. 14 In the Filter dialog. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 12 In the 2. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection pipe run. 13 On the Options Bar. and while pressing SHIFT. height. width. 15 Click in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. or width. and click OK. click Check None. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations.

All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 25mm diameter except for the supply pipe. verifying that it is connected. Modify the diameter of the main 19 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. 412 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and press TAB twice. For D: (diameter). select 25mm. 18 Place the cursor over a pipe segment. and the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for these pipes.16 On the Options Bar. 17 Select any pipe segment and verify the 25mm diameter on the Options Bar. you modify the diameter the main. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. Next. You changed the diameter for the pipe run because the majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 413 . If branch segments are selected. the pipe fittings. while pressing CTRL. draw a pick box around the horizontal main. 20 With the main selected. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection.NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. and the supply pipe. The selected main pipe displays in red.

so you need to exclude the supply pipe.You want to maintain the original supply pipe diameter. 414 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . for D:. especially around the pipe fittings. 22 In the 3D view. 25 Validate the pipe run geometry. and on the Options Bar. verify that the diameter is 150mm. while pressing SHIFT. select 100mm. 21 Click in a blank space in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. The diameter of the fire protection main changes. select the supply pipe to remove it from the selection. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 In the 3D view. select the supply pipe.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 415 . and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 rooms in the building. 27 Enter ZR.Modify the diameter of branch pipes 26 Click in the 2 . 28 Select the first pipe segment that services Conference Room 31 and directly connects to the main. You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the code requirements.Fire Prot view to make it active. Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers.

30 Select the next pipe segment to the right.Fire Prot view. under Category. 36 On the Options Bar. you tag some of the pipes enabling you to identify their diameters. and 2 in the open space). and after the segment highlights. The pipe segments including the elbow and 2 tee fittings display in red. Later in this exercise. for D:. 33 On the Options Bar. 39 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment that connects the conference room branch to the main. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe segments and fittings. You can verify this selection in the 3D view.This pipe segment services 6 sprinklers (4 in the office and conference room. zoom in on the branch that you modified. and click to select them. Next. 35 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Click Tags. select 50mm. verify that M_Pipe Size Tag is loaded. 38 Click OK. The specifications requires a diameter of 50mm for this pipe segment. Next. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. 29 On the Options Bar. for D:. 416 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The rest of this pipe branch services 2 sprinklers. click to place the tag. select 40mm. for Pipes. 37 In the Tag dialog. for D:. Clear Leader. Tag the pipes 34 In the 2 . you will complete the branch diameter modification. The pipe diameter is modified. click Tag ➤ By Category. 31 On the Options Bar. This segment services 5 sprinklers. select 40mm to comply with the design criteria. The 25mm pipe diameter complies with the design criteria. you continue to modify the pipe branch. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. 32 Place the cursor over the pipe segment that connects the conference room sprinklers to the Open 2 sprinkler.

you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. select Leader. 43 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. and finish placing the pipe tags. 42 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). 41 Place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell.NOTE Tags are view specific. you place a tag and include a leader line. Next. Next. 40 On the Options Bar. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 417 . They display only in the view in which they were placed.

You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using a floor plan and the 3D view. and finish tagging the pipes. 418 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you tagged the pipes. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. In this tutorial. 2 3 4.Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 44 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. you confirmed the logical systems using the System Browser. This completes the Designing Fire Protection Systems lesson. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system consisting of sprinklers and piping. enter Modifying Pipe Diameter Training for File name.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Sprinklers Serviced 1. In the lesson. and click Save. Finally. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. each system was completely different. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. The completed fire protection system is included in the m Completed Fire Protection System. For additional practice. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Finally. navigate to the folder of your choice. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. In this exercise. Although the creation and modification methods remained the same. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 45 In the Save As dialog.

and a roof garden. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. balconies. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces.Documenting Your Projects 2 In this section of the tutorials. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2008. lofty ceilings. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. 419 . exterior fire stairs. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored.

420 | Chapter 6 Documenting Your Projects . slight modifications to the building design have been made.NOTE For training purposes.

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 6 In this tutorial. including plan. section. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 421 .

and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. how to create section and elevation views. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you learn how to create views from a building model.Creating Views In this lesson. 422 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You learn how to create new views from existing views.

double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. Duplicating Plan Views | 423 . enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.rvt. select Level 2. 9 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser.

double-click Vicinity Plan. 11 Under Floor Plans. 424 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 12 In the Rename View dialog. enter Vicinity Plan. Next. click the current scale. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 14 On the View Control Bar. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 13 In the Project Browser. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. and click OK. and click 1: 1000. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser.

rvt.16 Right-click. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 425 . All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Elevation. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. select Elevation: Building Elevation. for Scale. double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. 426 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select1:100.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.

enter South East.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 427 . click Modify. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. double-click South East. and click OK. under Elevations. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 10 In the Rename View dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 8 On the Design Bar. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser.

Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 15 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). select Section: Building Section. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 14 In the Type Selector. select 1:100. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. ■ Move the cursor down. for Scale. click Section. and double-click Level 1. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 428 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and click to place it. Click the midpoint of the section line. click Split Segment. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 429 . drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

expand Sections (Building Section). and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. and double-click Section 1. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 24 Select gridline F.21 On the Design Bar. 430 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 23 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.

Creating Callout Views | 431 . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Modify. To create each view.25 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view .

select Floor Plan. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 432 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select 1:50. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. and select the callout boundary. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. under Floor Plans. and specify a point to complete the callout. click Callout. click Modify. for Scale. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar.

Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head.■ Select the middle grip. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and click OK. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. click Modify. 9 In the Rename View dialog. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views | 433 . 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. enter Enlarged Stair Plan.

select 1:50. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. for Scale. double-click Section 1. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 13 In the Type Selector.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. under Sections (Building Sections). select Detail View: Detail. 434 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

16 Modify the callout leader as shown. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. enter Roof Overhang Detail. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 18 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Callout Views | 435 . 17 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details). under Detail Views (Details). double-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK.

Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. You change the appearance of the section mark head. the elevation markers. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Existing stair callout head and boundary 436 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

12 For Section Tag. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click Open. select Section Head . and can be applied to the section line. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 437 . and click OK twice. double-click Level 1. . and click OK. click Load into Project. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Name dialog. 10 On the floor plan. for Section Head.Filled. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Custom. click Duplicate. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. select Custom-Section Head. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. clear any others. 15 Under Category. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. enter Section Head – Custom. click the Annotation Objects tab.rvt. and click OK. select the section line. Section Tail – Filled. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select the current project. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. Section Tail .rfa. click Edit/New. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. scroll to Section Line. and click OK.

29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 17 Under Category. for Elevation Tag. select Square. open Metric\Families\Annotations.rfa. click Duplicate. select Custom-Callout Head. 438 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. On the floor plan.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Training Files. and click Open. and select 3. 19 Click OK.5 mm. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. scroll to Section Marks. and on the Options Bar. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. select the current project.5mm Square. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. For Line Weight. and select 2. On the floor plan. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. select 3. enter 12. and click OK. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Load into Project. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. notice the square elevation markers that display. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. clear all others. select 12. enter 12. 27 Click OK twice.5mm Square. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. . 22 In the Name dialog. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Edit/New. and click OK.

click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 In the drawing. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. . 49 Click OK. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. expand Callout Boundary. 40 Press ESC. enter 6 mm. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 43 Under Category. For Corner Radius. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 45 For Line Pattern. click Edit/New. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select the callout. for Callout Tag. click the Annotation Objects tab. and on the Options Bar. 46 Under Category. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 34 In the Name dialog. and select 7. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 439 . and select 4. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan.33 In the Type Properties dialog. select Dash. select . click Duplicate. enter . 38 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 39 Click OK twice. Click OK.

View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and apply it to multiple elevation views. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 440 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. The crop region displays as red. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. In the left pane of the Open dialog.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Training Files. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. masking regions. and visual overrides. filters. and double-click East. You learn to create view templates. under Elevations. Creating a View Template In this exercise. To accomplish this. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. view regions.

6 On the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. under Elevations. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 441 . Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. under Visibility. 5 On the View Toolbar. click Zoom to Fit. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Entourage. and click Properties. under Extents.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 8 Click OK. 13 Under Visibility. right-click East.

21 In the Select View Template dialog. and click Create View Template From View. grids. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. elevation markers. 20 In the Project Browser. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. Callouts. 19 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View Control bar. and click OK.14 Click OK. right-click North. click Apply. and click Apply View Template. double-click North. 442 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. and section lines are now hidden in the view. right-click East. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. under Elevations. levels. 18 In the View Templates dialog. click OK. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 16 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 17 In the New View Template dialog.

you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. select Level Below (Level 4). under Floor Plans. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. Under View Depth.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. View Range and Plan Regions | 443 . right-click. for View Range. and click Properties. for Bottom. 2 In the Project Browser.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Penthouse. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. click Edit. select Level Below (Level 4). double-click Penthouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. for Level. Click OK twice.

double-click Roof Plan. under Floor Plans. for View Range.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. right-click. Under View Depth. and click Properties. select Roof Plan. select Level 4. for Bottom. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. under Extents. click Edit. Click OK twice. 444 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level 4. for Level.

15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Extents. Under View Depth. click Lines. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. Move you cursor diagonally. click Plan Region. for Bottom. click Modify. select Unlimited. 17 On the Design Bar. click Edit. click Region Property. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). for View Range. In the left corner of the building. 13 On the Design Bar. for Level. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. View Range and Plan Regions | 445 . 16 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. 10 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice.

6 In the Filter Name dialog. 446 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Walls. the fire rating of the walls. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. click (New). 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 7 In the Filters dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. expand Floor Plans. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Categories. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. and click OK. in this case. After you apply the filter. 1 In the Project Browser. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. under Filters. click the Filters tab. and double-click Level 1. click Edit/New.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Views (all). enter Rated Walls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select Fire Rating.

Enter Hr. 9 Click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 17 Using the same method. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. and click OK. for Color. Masking Portions of a View | 447 . select the red color. click Add. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. click Remove. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. under Basic colors. for Rated Walls. 14 In the Color dialog. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. 16 Click OK. 11 Select Rated Walls. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 10 On the Filter tab. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Projection/Surface. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. and click OK. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click OK. To accomplish this.■ ■ Select contains. click No Override. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Pattern. select Solid Fill. click Override under Patterns. and click OK.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Show Crop Region.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and click Rename. and click OK. right-click. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 5 On the View menu. as shown. 448 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt.

and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. select Invisible lines.7 On the View menu. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 12 On the Options Bar. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Masking Region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the crop region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click (Rectangle). 11 In the Type Selector. Masking Portions of a View | 449 . 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown.

under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch.14 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1. 450 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. right-click Unit 18 Plan . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

select Walls. click in the Patterns field. and click OK.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and click Rename. for Pattern. for Color. and click OK. select Solid fill. click No Override. 11 Click OK twice. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click 1: 50. click the current scale. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. right-click. under Pattern Overrides. Working with Visual Overrides | 451 . Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 7 Under Cut. click black. 4 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. right-click. under Visibility. and click Override.

12 On the Design Bar. clear Floors. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Grids. click Modify. and click OK. 452 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 16 Under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. under Visibility.

Working with Visual Overrides | 453 . 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click.

By using the previous method to make the selection. click Override. click a purple color. select the sofa. for Pattern. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. right-click. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 21 Under Projection/Surface. and click OK.20 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click Projection Lines. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. click By Category Override. 23 In the Color dialog. for Color. 29 In the Color dialog. under Lines. 454 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 28 For Color. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 25 Click OK twice. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. click No Override. select Dash. and click OK twice. select a bright green color.

The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click . and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 455 . The hidden crop region is also revealed. 33 On the View Control Bar. click . 32 Select one of the lamps.

select A0 metric. right-click. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. 456 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.rvt. how to add views to the sheets. and click View.Creating Sheets.34 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. click Training Files. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. and click OK. click Sheet. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar.

enter Site Plan. on the Options Bar. click Modify. and select the title block. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 .Unnamed. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. For Sheet Number. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). expand Sheets (all). For Sheet Name. Creating Drawing Sheets | 457 .A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. enter A101. 3 In the Project Browser. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 5 When the title block highlights.

Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter 2007-1. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block.■ Click OK. For Client Name. For Project Status. 458 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Project Name. enter Freighthouse Flats. click Edit. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. The new project information displays in the titleblock. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. Smith. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter For Approval. enter 15 May. enter J. 2007. For Project Number. 14 Click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. for Project Address. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. under Other. 11 In the Edit Text dialog.

The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 4 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.Stairs In the following exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 17 In the Project Browser. and click Save.rvt. enter Floor Plan. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. you add views to these sheets. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Sections A108 . and click OK.Floor Plan. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and drag it to the sheet. under Sheets (all). and click to place the view. Adding Views to Sheets | 459 . select the new sheet name.Elevations A105 .Layout Plan A104 . select Level 1. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Modify. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. right-click. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select A0 metric.rvt. for Name. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click Rename. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . double-click A102 .Elevations A107 . 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet.Elevations A106 .

under Sheets (all). and click to place it. and click to place it.Elevations. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet.The red border around the view no longer displays. under Elevations (Building Elevation). drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. align it with the East elevation. double-click A104 . 460 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and click to place it. 16 Select title bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 461 . click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. . 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). select 1:5. click Modify. and click to place it. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. double-click A107 . Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. for View Scale. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. under Sheets (all).Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar.Sections.

View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Under Floor Plans. double-click A108 . 19 On the Design Bar. zoom in to the grip. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. click Modify. move the cursor over it. double-click Level 1. and press TAB until it highlights. 21 Zoom to the stair callout.Stairs. 462 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. under Sheets (all). under Floor Plans. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar.

Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.Sections. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. under Sheets (all). Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. In order to do this. you must first activate the view on the sheet. and then make changes and deactivate the view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 463 . double-click A107 . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.

and click Deactivate View. 5 On the Design Bar.2 Select the building section view. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. right-click. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 16700 mm. and click Activate View. 464 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 6 Right-click. and press ENTER. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. click Modify. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click North.

The camera view displays. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. select A0 metric. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise.rvt. enter Title Sheet. enter T. double-click Level 1. select the new sheet name. 7 Place the camera as shown. For Sheet Name. You modify the view to hide the view title. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Click OK. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 465 . click Camera. 3 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. and click Properties. right-click. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. After you create the sheet. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet.

466 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Eye Elevation. select Far Clip Active. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. Under Camera. Click OK. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.8 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. enter 1500 mm. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on.Title Sheet. 11 On the View Control Bar. For Far Clip Offset. enter100000 mm. Under Extents. under Sheets (all). click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 14 Under 3D Views. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 12 On the View Control Bar. double-click T . enter 18000 mm For Target Elevation.

click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 467 . and click OK. click Duplicate. click Modify. under Graphics. select Scale (locked proportions). click Edit/New. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click Modify. Under Model Crop Size. on the Options Bar. enter 635 mm. click Size. for Show title. . 25 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Click Apply. select No. 19 Select the view on the sheet. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 22 In the Name dialog. enter Viewport/no title mark. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height. and then click OK.15 With the view selected. 24 Click OK twice.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file. 468 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

in your Revit MEP 2008 projects. such as room and window schedules. 469 . such as doors and windows.Tagging and Scheduling 7 In this tutorial. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. You also learn to create different types of schedules.

such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room Separation. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.Tagging Objects In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. and click Room and Area. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. Because of the open style floor plan. expand Floor Plans.Level 1.rvt. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. right-click in the Design Bar. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 470 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 471 .4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. move the cursor to the right. as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.

click Training Files. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged.7 On the Design Bar. click OK. and the rectangle contains the room tag. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. indicating that it can be edited. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Room. 13 On the Options Bar. click Load. and click to place the room and tag. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 11 In the Tags dialog. and select the room tag. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. The room tag number displays in blue. click Modify. 9 In the Tags dialog. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 472 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Modify.

click Modify.16 Zoom in on the tag number. enter Entry. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 473 . Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. enter U18-1. Click to place the new room and tag. 18 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 17 Click the room text label. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Room. click it.

21 Click the room text label. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 474 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Dining. click Modify. and press ENTER. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Sequential letters are also supported. enter Kitchen. 20 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. in the Project Browser.rvt. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. you learn how to place door and window tags. clear Room Separation.Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and moving clockwise. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.rvt. Tagging Doors and Windows | 475 . The rooms are already placed. but they need to be tagged. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . and click OK. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 28 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. expand Lines. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.Level 2. click Room Tag. Model Categories tab.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 26 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

and press ENTER. clear Leader. and click OK. under Identify Data. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 476 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. enter U18-2. click Tag ➤ By Category. click (Properties). for Mark. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. enter U18-1. 3 On the Options Bar.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Door Tags. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.Level 2. and drag it down to center it in the doorway. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. Tagging Doors and Windows | 477 . under Category. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. click Tag All Not Tagged. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. and click OK. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser.

click Training Files. and click OK. 478 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . select Window. click Tag All Not Tagged.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. expand Floor Plans. 21 Click OK.rfa. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. 19 In the Tags dialog. and double-click Level 1. click Load. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser.

expand Floor Plans. 26 On the View toolbar.rvt. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 3 On the Options Bar. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 At the confirmation prompt. 28 Select Window Tags. click Training Files. double-click Level 2. click Tag ➤ By Category. 27 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Yes to load a tag. click Tag All Not Tagged. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. select Leader. 25 Under Floor Plans. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select a dining room chair. Tagging Other Objects | 479 . Tagging Other Objects In this exercise.rfa. and modify the tag placement and display.Level 1. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom flyout.

12 Click the elbow control. 11 Select the tag for the table. and drag it above the chair tag. 480 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .8 Select the furniture in the living room. 9 Click Modify. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. and drag it up to form an angled leader. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 14 Click Modify. clear Leader. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). 13 Optionally. and on the Options Bar.

16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. 20 On the Options Bar.Level 2. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. Tagging Other Objects | 481 . and on the Design Bar. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. and click OK. select M_Furniture tag : Standard. 18 On the Design Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan . under Floor Plans. click (Filter Selection). click Tag All Not Tagged.

you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. and click Modify. click Check None. 22 In the Type Selector. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. select Furniture Tags. 482 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.21 In the Filter dialog.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Creating a Window Schedule | 483 . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. Next. a schedule that lists every window in the building. in which windows are listed by window type. Finally. that is. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.rvt.

and click View. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. right-click in the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. select Windows. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 9 Click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and double-click Level 1. and click OK.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Under Available fields. expand Floor Plans. 4 For Name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. enter Building Window Schedule. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 484 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 7 Using the same method. select Comments and click Add. under Category. click the Fields tab. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. NOTE By clicking Show. and click View Properties.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. in large building models with many views. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. If no open view shows the selected element. you are prompted to open one that does. click Edit. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. However. click Close. right-click the schedule. select Type Mark. under Other. expand Schedules/Quantities. and on the Options Bar. this can be a time-consuming process. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Creating a Window Schedule | 485 . 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. for Sort by. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Show. for Sorting/Grouping.

Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted.The window schedule is displayed. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. under Floor Plans. for Sorting/Grouping. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. sorted by type mark. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. clear Itemize every instance. The window type schedule is displayed. and press ENTER. click Edit. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. under Other. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. 22 Click OK twice. 486 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. and click View Properties. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. double-click Level 2.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. 5 Click OK. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. select Type. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. expand Schedules/Quantities. for Name. jamb. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. click Add to create the new parameter. and double-click Building Window Schedule. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. For Discipline. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 487 .rvt. In this case. unlike shared parameters. select Construction. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click OK. you cannot use them to tag objects. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Under Parameter Data. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. enter Head Detail. and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. 488 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . for Fields. click Edit. under Other. enter Window Details. and Sill Detail. 12 Click OK twice. right-click Building Window Schedule. click in the Head Detail header. TIP To select all 3 headers. and while pressing the left mouse button. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Available fields. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. Jamb Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. so that they are listed before Comments. and click Properties. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. select Head Detail. click Group. select the following fields.

Enter U18 in the third field. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. For example. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. and for Sill Detail.Door Schedule. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. 4 Click OK. Under Name. for Jamb Detail. under Type Mark A. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Schedule/Quantities. select the following fields. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Fields tab. enter 3/A107. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. Verify Schedule building components is selected. for Head Detail. select Doors. enter Unit 18 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule.Level 1. expand Floor Plans. enter 1/A107. You then hide the column used for the filter.rvt. 6 Under Available fields. enter 2/A107. Select contains in the second field. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 489 . you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. select Mark. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. and double-click A102 . The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 490 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and drag it to the sheet. 10 Under Fields. select Family and Type. and click OK.Door Schedule. 11 Under Field formatting. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).Unit 18. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 15 On the Design Bar. but is not included as a column in the schedule. click Unit 18 . expand Sheets (all). select Hidden Field. 13 In the Project Browser. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only.

Creating a Room Schedule | 491 . 3 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Add. right-click in the Design Bar. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. 7 To the right of Header text. 19 On the Design Bar. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. under Available fields. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Number. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. click Modify. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. select Rooms. double-click Level 1. and click View.rvt. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 8 Click OK. 5 Using the same method. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. For 103. and press ENTER. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. and press ENTER.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. add 5 more rooms. enter Corridor. For 105. enter Storage. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. 11 Using the same method. for Name. enter Building Entry. 101-106. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. For 104. select Storage. next to Rows. 492 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . select Corridor. 10 Edit the number to be 101. The room Number is U17-9. For 102. for room 101. click New. and press ENTER. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar.

In the Line Graphics dialog. place rooms from a program list. click the bright green swatch. click Room Separation. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. and modify room names. and click OK. select 9. enter Stair. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. expand Lines. For Room Separation. For Weight. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. In the Lines field. click Override. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. and click OK. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. you add room separation lines. and press ENTER.rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Under Custom colors. under Projection/Surface. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 493 . double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans.■ For 106. click the Lines field. click the Color field.

494 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. draw the horizontal line. click Room. First. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar.

select 102 Storage. 13 For Offset. for Room. 12 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 495 . 10 On the Options Bar. for Room. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right). enter 2400 mm.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing.

under Schedules/Quantities. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser.14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Room Schedule. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 496 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. double-click Level 1. and zoom in to the Corridor. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms.

25 In the New Schedule dialog. 29 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. select Base Finish. enter As Selected. Floor Finish. clear Room Bounding. and click OK. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). and for all 3 finishes. select Rooms. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 497 . 22 On the Design Bar. click (Properties). 23 In the Project Browser. 26 Select Schedule keys. and click OK. enter Units. and Wall Finish. double-click Room Schedule. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 30 For Key Name. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. while pressing CTRL. click Schedule/Quantities. under Category.19 While pressing CTRL. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Available fields. and click Add. click New to add a new row. click Modify.

select Units. Zoom flyout. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. for Available fields. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule.31 Using the same method. 498 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room Style. click Edit. click Room Style. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. click Check None. click (Filter Selection). 37 Under U17-8. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Filter dialog. 39 On the View toolbar. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 32 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. and click OK. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. 35 Click OK twice. double-click Room Schedule. double-click Level 1. for Fields. and click Properties. under Schedules/Quantities. and click Add. 41 On the Options Bar. right-click Room Schedule. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. click Zoom To Fit. 36 In the Project Browser. under Other. under Floor Plans.

47 Click File menu ➤ Save. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. and click OK. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 103. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. for Room Style. 45 In the Project Browser. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. expand Floor Plans. 8 Click OK. and click OK. right-click Level 1. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). double-click Room Schedule. select Service. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. click (Duplicate).43 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Project Browser. click OK. 104. enter Room Type. select Room Type. select Units. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Room Style. and apply it to the Level 1 view. For rooms 102 and 105. click the Color Scheme field. under Views (all). click (Properties). and click Properties. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and 106. under Floor Plans. at the warning prompt. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. and double-click Level 1. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 499 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. for Name. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. enter Room Type. 5 For Title. under Identity Data. select Public.rvt. 6 For Color.

click Color Scheme Legend. under Custom color. select blue. 16 On the Design Bar. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). select Foreground. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. 22 In the Color dialog. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). expand Lines. and click OK twice.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. clear Visible. and clear Room Separation. click Modify. 18 On the Options Bar. click the value in the Color column. and click OK. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. click Edit. 500 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . for Display Color Fill in. click Edit Color Scheme. select the color legend. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend.

for Size. enter 25 mm. 24 Click OK. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Swatch Width. 27 In the Type Properties dialog.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. and click OK twice. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 501 . 28 Under Title Text. enter 5 mm. (Properties). click Edit/New. under Graphics. on the Options Bar.

29 On the Design Bar.rvt. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. 502 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . under 3D Views. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click {3D}. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. click Modify. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates.

4 In the Type Selector. under Category. 5 On the Design Bar. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. Clear Itemize every instance. For Then by. Creating a Material Takeoff | 503 . The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select Calculate totals. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. click Modify.EPDM.3 While pressing CTRL. Select Grand totals. and click Add. select Roofs. 9 Using the same method. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. Under Field formatting. select Material: Description. 12 Click OK. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . select Family and Type.Insulation on Plywood Deck . and click OK. 11 Click the Formatting tab. under Available fields. click Family and Type. select Material: Area.

enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. for Name. enter Estimated Cost. right-click Roof Material Takeoff.40 50. 24 In the Project Browser. and click Add. under Other. click Edit.80 5. 17 Click Calculated Value. 22 For Field formatting. and click OK twice. and click Properties. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 20 Click OK.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2).35 The Estimated cost is calculated. click Material: Cost. 504 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. under Available fields. for Fields. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. select Calculate totals. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 21 Click the Formatting tab. 19 For Formula. for the Material: Cost field. and under Fields. and click Properties. 23 In the Material Takeoff. click Estimated Cost.

adding the shared parameters to a family.rvt. For Units. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. ensuring consistency across families and projects. These shared parameters can be added to any family. and reporting the shared parameters.25 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a shared parameter file. and are defined and stored in an external file. creating a generic tag to tag the family. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. For Rounding. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Fields. for Formatting. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. click Estimated Cost. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. select 2 decimal places. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 505 . 27 Click Field Format. select Fixed. either within family components or within the project template. regardless of category. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. You draw a travel path line. click Edit. and schedule the total distance of each path. 28 Click OK 3 times. you create an exiting plan for the building. tag the line. click Training Files.

8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 9 Under Parameters. for Type of Parameter. 506 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click New. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. for File name. and click OK. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Create. enter Path ID. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. enter Exiting. select Length. and click OK. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. and click OK. and click Save. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.rvt. click New. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. for Name. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Floor Plans. 11 Click OK. click Training Files. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 7 Under Parameters. click New. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. enter Travel Distance. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise.rvt. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file.txt.1 In the Project Browser. under Groups. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. for Name. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1.

the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. for Travel Distance Formula. 11 In the Family Types dialog. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Load into Projects. 3 On the Design Bar. following the equals symbol (=). click Family Types.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Add. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. 8 Select Instance. group it under Dimensions. Click Training Files. 9 In the Family Types dialog. and select Instance.rvt. click Add. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. enter Length. 7 For Group parameter under. in the Load into Projects dialog. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. If you have multiple projects open. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 507 . under Dimensions. select Shared parameter. 4 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameters. and click OK. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. select Constraints. and click Select. under Parameters. 12 Click Apply. 14 If necessary. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. and click OK. and click OK.

20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. and click Open. 24 On the Design Bar. click Add. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Travel Distance. 17 Select Generic Tag. click Modify. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 26 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.rft. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 508 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . under Parameters. and click OK 3 times. click Label. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter.rft. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Label. click Select. 19 On the Design Bar.

and press DELETE.Level 1. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Placing. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. and click Save.rfa. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. click Load into Projects. 31 On the Design Bar.Tagging. enter M_Travel Distance Tag. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. Placing. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 509 .rvt is selected. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. double-click Exiting Plan . and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. 30 In the Save As dialog. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. After the lines are tagged.rvt. select Path ID. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.27 In the drawing window. and click OK. for File Name. under Floor Plans. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.Tagging. and move it down. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window.

above the exterior door as shown. select Chain. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the right. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 510 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .2 Zoom in to the corridor. and click in the center of the corridor. click Component. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Placing. click Component. 8 On the Design Bar.Level 2. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click outside of the building. through the door. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. clear Leader.7 Move the cursor down. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 13 While pressing CTRL. under Floor Plans. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 511 . verify that Chain is selected. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the Options Bar.Tagging. and click (Properties). click Modify. click Modify. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 1-1. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. double click Exiting Plan . under Constraints. for Path ID. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click above the door to the stair. click Modify. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. 21 On the Design Bar. and click. move the cursor near the right corner.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. click Component. 512 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 22 Click at the center starting point.

click Tag ➤ By Category. and click in the stair. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 513 . Placing. and click OK. click Modify. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. under Constraints. (Properties). 27 On the Design Bar. 33 For Name. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tagging. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. under Category. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. enter 2-1. enter Level 1 Exit Distance. and click OK. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. for Path ID. 26 Select each of the travel path lines.23 Move the cursor down. 28 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. 24 On the Design Bar.

click Training Files. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. for Filter by. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. for Filter. 44 In the Project Browser. and click OK. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click View. 35 Click the Filter tab. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and in the third field. and click Rename. click Edit. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. 43 In the Project Browser. while pressing CTRL. 514 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. in the second field. right-click the Design Bar. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Path ID and Travel Distance. enter 1-. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. select contains. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 41 Under Fields. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 38 For Sort by. and click Add. in the third field. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK twice. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. select Travel Distance. click Schedule/Quantities. enter 2-. select Path ID.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. under Available fields. 36 For Filter by. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Calculate Totals. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 42 Click OK. in the first field. and under Field formatting. select Path ID. under Other. 46 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. under Schedules/Quantities. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK.152 mm. select the following fields. and click the browse button. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. for Assembly Code.2 In the New Schedules dialog.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 .Partitions . click the Fields tab. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 515 . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 4 Under Available fields. expand C . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. select Walls. and click Properties. and click OK twice. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Categories. click the Value field.Fixed Partitions. right-click Generic . click C1010145 .Interiors\C10 . expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall.

click Export ➤ ODBC Database. select a location for the database file. and click OK to create the database. and click Next.9 In the schedule. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. Additionally. 1 On the File menu. click Training Files. 6 Click Finish. 9 Under Directories. click Create.rvt. and click Next. Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. under Database Name. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 3 Click New. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. and open the database in Microsoft Access. 10 Close the exercise file. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. click OK. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.mdb for Database Name. click OK in the dialog. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the File Data Source tab. 8 In the New Database dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. enter Revit_Project. 10 When the confirmation displays. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 516 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. under Database.

Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 517 . which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. For example. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. in addition to the Id column. 13 Close the exercise file.

518 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

519 . you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 8 In this tutorial. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2008 projects.

You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 520 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.

rvt. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m.Relocating a Project In this exercise. Relocating a Project | 521 . click Training Files. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.

8 Select the Level 1 line. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. click (Properties). the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. The south elevation is displayed. By selecting the Level 1 line. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. By entering 10000 mm in this step. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. and click OK. However. In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. expand Views (all). for Elevation Base. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Shared Elevation. The levels in the project are not shared. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 522 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. enter8 mm Head . and double-click South. Under Constraints. enter 10000 mm. you specify the new location of the project. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. and press ENTER. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 6 Click OK twice. 10 On the View menu. select Shared. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. If you did that now. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated.

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. double-click North.Shared Elevation. Relocating a Project | 523 . 13 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. click Modify. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Type Selector. select Level : 8 mm Head . as well as other views of the building model.

In the Type Selector. On the Design Bar. click Modify.Shared Elevation. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. the Penthouse level. and the Roof Plan level. 524 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Level : 8 mm Head . and select Levels 2-4.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL.

Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. click File menu ➤ Save As. radial. In this case. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. expand Views (all). Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created.16 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In Revit MEP. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. “Dimensioning” on page 525. permanent dimensions are created automatically. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. Dimensioning | 525 . multi-segmented. and angular dimensions. Dimensioning In this lesson. You place linear. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser.

The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. 526 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . snap to wall centerlines. dimensions are aligned. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. select it. and are created by selecting individual reference points. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. select it. click Dimension. By default.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view.

click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Creating Dimensions | 527 . The lock displays as locked. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.5 Move the cursor above the view. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. and click to place the dimension.

click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. 12 13 On the Options Bar. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. and select it. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 15 Move the cursor to the right. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 11 Using the same method.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. 528 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . but below the first dimension that you placed. select the right endpoint of the planter. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. select the right side of the curtain wall. and select its left exterior face. for Prefer. 17 Move the cursor up. select Wall Faces. above the plan view of the building. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays.

Creating Dimensions | 529 . 26 Select the radial dimension. click Modify. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. click Dimension. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. For Prefer. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select it.19 On the Basics tab. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. select Wall faces. and specify a point to place the dimension.

enter Typ. verify Wall faces is selected.. click Modify.28 With the dimension still selected. Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. click Dimension. on the Options Bar. click (Properties). 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). 530 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 30 On the Basics tab. for Suffix. For Prefer. 34 Select the horizontal line.

and click to place the dimension. 37 On the Basics tab. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 531. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. click Modify. When you dimension the wall. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. you select only the wall. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 531 . 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc.

You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. For Pick. Click Options. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. select Entire Walls.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 532 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and double-click Level 3. select Wall centerlines. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. and select Widths. Click OK. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. select Openings.

2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. in some cases. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and double-click Level 1. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. and click to place the automatic dimension string. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. However. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. 7 On the Basics tab. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. Controlling Witness Lines | 533 . for a multi-segmented dimension. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. For example. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 533. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. expand Views (all). When you place dimensions.

select Individual References. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. click Dimension. verify Wall centerlines is selected. select the right edge of the planter. 534 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and select it. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. For Pick. 7 Using the same method. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. and click to place the dimension. move the cursor down.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. select the bottom right endpoint. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. and select it. 10 Using the same method. and specify a point to place the dimension. 11 Move the cursor down. Controlling Witness Lines | 535 .

18 Press and hold SHIFT. select Wall centerlines. 13 On the Options Bar. and when the wall centerline highlights. and click to place the dimension. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. and drag the dimension down the wall.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. click Modify. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. select it. for Prefer. 536 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 16 On the Design Bar. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. click Dimension.

19 Release SHIFT. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 537. click Modify. 22 On the Basics tab. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. 20 Release SHIFT. After you create the new family type. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. and using the same methods. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 537 .

for Text Size. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select CityBlueprint. and click OK.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. enter 3.2 mm. for Tick Mark. and select the lower dimension. 2 Click (Properties).dimension tick mark. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog. Under Text. 538 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . enter Office Standard. select Arrow 30 Degree. For Text Font. text font. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.

10 On the Basics tab. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 539 . click Modify. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. 9 In the Type Selector. ■ Click OK twice. select another font. 7 On the Basics tab. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. click Modify. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. and select the bottom dimension.

You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. 540 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and modify it to use the office standard parameters. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building.11 Using the same method. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 540. select the angular dimension on the planter. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. and how to add leaders to the text notes. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. create a new angular dimension type. 12 Proceed to the next lesson.

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. click Text.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Leader. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. but below the upper dimension string. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 541 .rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. click (None). and click and drag to create a text box. zoom to planter near grid line 5. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan.

9 In the Type Properties dialog. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. 11 Under Text.5 In the text box. enter EXISTING BUILDING. and click . 10 In the Name dialog box. If so. and click OK. for Text Size. and click OK. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. enter 6 mm. and click OK. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. click Modify. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 542 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. select Arc Leaders. click Edit/New. under Graphics. 7 Select the text box.

click Modify. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 543 .Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). 15 On the Design Bar. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. click Text. and enter Planting Bed. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4.

click Modify. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 544 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 20 On the Design Bar. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). for New. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. click Modify. for Leader Arrowhead. select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Graphics. Click OK twice. enter Standard Notes. and click OK. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. select CityBlueprint. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . In the Rename dialog. Click Rename. click Edit/New. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. Under Text. for Text font. 24 On the Design Bar.

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. click Text. for Leader. 26 In the Type Selector.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. click to place the text box. select Text: Standard Notes. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 545 . click (Arc). over the Planting Bed text. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text.

32 If you want to save your changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and enter 457 mm Conc. 546 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the exercise file with a unique name. Wall.31 Click in the text box.

547 . These components display at the required scale. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and metal studs. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail.Detailing 9 In this tutorial. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. plywood. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2008. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. like a standard door header condition.

you detail the view of the roof edge. You load detail components. click Training Files. Detailing the View In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. After you add components. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. add detail components. region objects. you trace over the building model geometry. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. In order to detail from the building model. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. In the callout view. as well as detail lines. 548 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and insulation objects. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. which means that all detail components. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. They are also view specific.

Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model.rfa. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select Corrugated Metal. select As underlay. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Repeating Detail. click Duplicate. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. The roof overhang detail displays. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 5 In the alert dialog. 16 Click OK twice. 13 In the Name dialog. 15 For Spacing. 17 In the drawing area. click . and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. 7 In the drawing area. 8 Delete the component. click Training Files. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 406. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click Detail Component. Detailing the View | 549 . 10 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.5mm. Exact location is not important. double-click the detail callout head.

23 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click Detail Component. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. ■ Click Modify. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 550 | Chapter 9 Detailing . Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click Load. click (Move). Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE.

Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 32 To properly orient the component. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. you load them as a group from a single file. click OK. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.rvt.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Detailing the View | 551 . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. and click Open. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. Because you still have several components to load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 31 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. and click Open. press SPACEBAR 3 times. and place it in the detail view as shown. click Training Files.rfa. 34 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 30 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected.

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. click Insulation. and click Modify. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. 552 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 37 Place the wallboard component as shown.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. 39 Select the horizontal segment. 36 On the Options Bar. select Chain. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 38 Click Modify. click the Flip instance arrows.

Detailing the View | 553 .41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. click Detail Component. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. ■ Click Modify. For Offset. and on the Edit toolbar. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. select to near side. 43 Click Modify. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. as shown. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. 46 In the Type Selector. click (Move). enter 140mm.

554 | Chapter 9 Detailing . select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 4 Click Modify. 2 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. they are view specific. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. you add lines to your detail. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 554. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. as shown. select Thin Lines. 53 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.48 In the Type Selector. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and lock the component. 52 Click Modify. Like detail components. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. meaning they display only in this view. click Detail Lines.

Adding Detail Lines | 555 . and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). as shown. select Thin Lines. For Offset. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. enter 10mm. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. as shown.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. 7 In the Type Selector. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. and press ENTER. select Medium Lines. For Offset.

select Thin Lines. and draw the detail lines as shown. 556 | Chapter 9 Detailing . draw the detail lines as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 18 In the Type Selector. as shown. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. select Chain.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. click (Draw).

under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 24 On the View Control Bar. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. select Vapor Barrier. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. click Detail Lines. When you turn the display model off. and click Properties. and click OK. select Do not display. For Offset. and press ENTER. 26 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click ➤ Hide Crop Region. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. enter 10mm. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 22 In the Project Browser. Adding Detail Lines | 557 . select the Penthouse level line.

rvt. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you add text notes to complete the detail. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 30 In the Type Selector. “Adding Text Notes” on page 558. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Component. 32 Click Modify. click Text. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. select M_Break Line. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask.29 On the Design Bar. 558 | Chapter 9 Detailing .

click (Arc) to create an arced leader. enter Typ. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click Modify.. and click (Properties). and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 7 Select the dimension line. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. Click again to specify the location of the text box. click Dimension.2 On the Options Bar. Enter the text. and click OK. for Text ➤ Suffix. Adding Text Notes | 559 . 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow.

right-click. select all the coping linework. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and press DELETE. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail.rvt. click Select All Instances. enter Roof Overhang Detail . click 6 In the Filter dialog. and click Rename. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). on the Options Bar. and selecting the chain. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select a text note. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. “Creating Detail Components” on page 560. pressing TAB. and save the exercise file.Keynotes. and click OK. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. (Filter Selection). 560 | Chapter 9 Detailing . click Roof Overhang Detail. 7 Click Modify.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. while pressing CTRL. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. right-click.

23 Using a window. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. clear Detail Items. select Medium Lines. select the coping. and click OK. 21 To place the component. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.Keynotes view is not the open view. click Training Files.rft. 24 On the Options Bar. navigate to your preferred location. double-click it in the Project Browser.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Creating Detail Components | 561 . While pressing SHIFT. and the component can be placed in the detail. for File name. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. click Detail Component. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Save As dialog. The original linework remains selected. in the Type Selector. 22 Click Modify. click . NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . and click Save. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. and click Open. click Load into Projects. enter Roof Edge. 25 In the Filter dialog. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 14 Click Modify. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 16 Click Modify.

and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.B5.rfa.rfa. 63mm Rigid Insulation. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. In the Keynotes dialog. 30 In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Element. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. 2 In the alert dialog. click Training Files. delete the underlying linework. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. Click to place the leader arm. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 31 Using the same method used previously. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Open. click Training Files. click Load. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 28 On the Options Bar. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 562 | Chapter 9 Detailing .26 Press DELETE. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. “Adding Keynotes” on page 562.rvt. and click Open. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. click Detail Component. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you place keynotes on objects.

11 Click OK 3 times. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.G1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. For the 50 x 200. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge.F1. FasciaProfile_1. For the 50 x 150. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). click Edit/New.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 12 On the Design Bar.D11. use keynote 06160.C1. use keynote 07645.D1. 6 Click Modify. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. use keynote 06110. 19mm Plywood. For the metal coping. use keynote 06110. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. use keynote 06110. use keynote 06160. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.F1. Roof Edge4. Adding Keynotes | 563 . click in the Value column.I1.D11. navigate to 07645. click Keynote ➤ Element. use keynote 09250.

and click Open. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the drawing area. for File name. 564 | Chapter 9 Detailing . a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. select the left end point of the reference line. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 6 Lock the line. select Medium Lines. and click Modify. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 564. click Lines. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. and select the right end point. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. navigate to your preferred location. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 18 Save the file. You do this in order to keynote the component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.20 Ga. click Training Files. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 22mm Corrugated Steel . and click Save.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. 4 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Save As dialog. click Detail Component.A8. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. using keynote 07460. 17 Keynote the component. 15 In the Type Selector.14 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. select Corrugated Metal. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Load into Projects.

24 While pressing CTRL. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 Next.11 Press DELETE. 30 Click Modify. click Edit/New. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. click in the Value column. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You add the components to the project and keynote them.A1. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click (Properties). 28 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. and hidden) used in the view. click Detail Component. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. 16 Select the component. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. 37 Click OK 3 times. and m_Light Line Detail Component. and click . click the end points at the top of the roof. enter EPDM Membrane. 15 Click Modify. 19 In the Name dialog. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. and click Open. 29 In the drawing area. 34 In the Name dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 565 . click Duplicate. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click Detail Component. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. click Training Files. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. select Medium Line Detail Component. invisible. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 22 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 31 Select the component. and click OK. select m_Light Line Detail Component.

click Detail Component. 42 Using the same method used previously.38 On the Design Bar. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. click Detail Component. 44 On the Design Bar. 566 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. and assign it keynote 07260.A5. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. and click . Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 41 Select the component just added. 48 Using the same method used previously. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 46 Click Modify. and click the lower end at the break line.G1. on the Edit toolbar. and assign it keynote 06110. 49 With the component selected. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. click Detail Component. (Move). name the component Air Barrier. and click . against the 3/4" plywood. 53 On the Options Bar. select Chain. 40 Click Modify. 47 Select the component. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 52 In the Type Selector.

Air Barrier. and click . 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 60 On the Design Bar. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. and assign it keynote 07260. name the component Vapor Barrier. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 567 .55 Click Modify. and Vapor Barrier. click Keynote ➤ Element. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.A4. leaving the detail component lines. 50 x 200 Framing. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 61 In the drawing area. 58 Using the method used previously.

71 Save the file. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component.. and click .A1. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. and press TAB. click File menu ➤ Save.A9. click Load into Projects.A4. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.rfa. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Enter 07460. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. name the component Batt Insul. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 568. in the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 568 | Chapter 9 Detailing . you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 69 Using the method used previously. Enter 07463.txt. 72 Proceed to the next exercise. 67 In the drawing area. 3 In the text editor. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. select Invisible Lines. and press TAB. select the component. click Detail Component.rfa. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. and assign it keynote 07210. 70 In the drawing area. 68 Select the component. add a keynote for the component. and press ENTER. and close the text editor. The database file opens in a text editor. 63 In the drawing area. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.

■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 11 Click Modify. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. The descriptive text for each keynote displays.A1. and click OK.txt. you learn how to create a drafted detail. select all the keynotes. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. navigate to 07463. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. 13 Click Modify. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 14 Save the file. click Browse. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. Creating a Drafted Detail | 569 . 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. under Keynote Table. and click Open. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. under Path Type. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Each keynote displays as a simple number. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. click Keynote ➤ Element. click to place the leader. and click to place the note. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library. 9 In the drawing area. and click OK. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. After you create a drafting view. In the Type Selector. select Absolute. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet.

“Creating a Reference Callout” on page 570. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 570 | Chapter 9 Detailing . The detail is imported as an import symbol. select Black and white. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. For Layer/Level Colors. select Center-to-center. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Click Open. enter EPDM Metal Coping. select Reference other view. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. click Callout. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. for Scale.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. right-click Drafting 1. and click OK. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. The detail that you import is in DWG format. select 1 : 5.dwg.

and double-click the callout. 12 Click OK twice. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 5 Click Modify. and click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Detail .4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Rename. and click OK. Creating a Reference Callout | 571 .No Reference. click Edit/New. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. delete the existing value. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 10 In the Rename dialog. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 Select the callout. click Modify. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. for New. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser.

for Name. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. double-click A105 . and click OK./Sect. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 18 Save the file. 3 On the View Control Bar. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. The callout is updated with the sheet information./Det. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 572 | Chapter 9 Detailing .No Reference). 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). enter Header @ Sliding Door.rvt. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.Elev. “Creating a Detail in the Drafting View” on page 572 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.

for Name. click Region Properties. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. select Gypsum-Plaster. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Selector. Board. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 16 Select the left edge of the region. select Wide Lines. . click Detail Component. 19 In the Type Selector. 18 While pressing CTRL. and click OK.5mm. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. and enter 20. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 573 . click Duplicate. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Name dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Filled Region. Draw a rectangle as shown. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 14 Click OK 3 times. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 Click Modify. select the width dimension.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . enter Gyp. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board.

click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). (Draw). Move the cursor up. Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. 574 | Chapter 9 Detailing .20 On the Design Bar. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. click Finish Sketch. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. and on the Edit toolbar. 24 Select the mirrored region. and click above the top of the region as the end point. click 22 On the Options Bar.

35 Select all the linework for the wood region. and click OK. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Finish Sketch.Finish. select Wood . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 575 . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar.Finish. click Edit/New. click Filled Region. 37 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. click . 33 Click OK 3 times. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. and select the right edge of the wood region. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click Region Properties. select Medium Lines. enter Wood . 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. in the Type Selector. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. Draw a rectangle as shown. verify that the thickness is 19mm.25 Click Modify. 30 In the Name dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Align). for Name. 28 In the Element Properties dialog.

38 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 39 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region, sketch the new region as shown; verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63.5mm.

42 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add a reference plane
43 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 44 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick).

For Offset, enter 6mm, and press ENTER.

45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.

46 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Align).

576 | Chapter 9 Detailing

47 Click the reference plane, and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 48 Click Modify.

Add a door panel
49 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 50 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 10mm, and press ENTER.

51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw).

■ ■ ■

For Offset, enter 0, and press ENTER. Select Chain.

53 Draw the door panel outline:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor left 25mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 305mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm, and click to select the point.

54 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Trim/Extend).

55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch, and select the bottom horizontal line. 56 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 577

Add mounting/sliding hardware
57 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 58 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 59 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 3mm, and press ENTER.

60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region. 61 Click Modify. 62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 76.2mm, and press ENTER. 63 Repeat for the right detail line.

Add mounting/sliding hardware
64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 65 On the Options Bar, click Load. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown.

578 | Chapter 9 Detailing

TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.

68 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.

70 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 71 On the Options Bar, click Load. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail; use the images as a guide.

74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

Add detail lines
75 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 76 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 579

78 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector, select Thin Lines. 80 On the Options Bar, click .

81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown.

82 Select the rectangle, and on the Edit toolbar, click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 84 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 85 On the Options Bar, click .

(Mirror).

86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.

580 | Chapter 9 Detailing

87 Click Modify. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region; drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.

89 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 90 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left, as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 581

92 Select the line, and on the Edit toolbar, click

(Mirror).

93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

94 Select the mirrored line on the right, select the length dimension, enter 3mm, and press ENTER. 95 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line, draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 97 On the Options Bar, click .

98 Click the end of the detail line on the left, and click to place the arc as shown.

582 | Chapter 9 Detailing

99 Click Modify.

Add two break lines
100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 101 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 102 In the Type Selector, select M_Break Line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

Add dimensions
104 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 105 In the drawing area, select the left edge of the horizontal wood region, and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 106 Click to place the dimension, and click Modify.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 583

107 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown, and click Modify.

110 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.

Add text notes to complete the detail
111 On the Design Bar, click Text. 112 In the Options Bar, click to create an arced leader.

113 In the drawing area, select the gypsum board region on the left, and click to place the text. 114 Enter Gyp. Board, and click Modify.

115 Select the note, and on the Options Bar, click

(Add Right Arc Leader).

116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

584 | Chapter 9 Detailing

117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

118 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command. 119 Save the file.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 585

586 | Chapter 9 Detailing

Finishing the Sheets

10

In this tutorial, you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation, including:
■ ■

Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications, such as images and text into project sheets

■ ■

587

Using Note Blocks
In this lesson, you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.

Creating a Note Block
In this exercise, you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats- Finishing-Sheets.rvt.

Load a generic annotation family
1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click East.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote - Hexagon.rfa. 5 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.

588 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown:

Create annotation marks for items requiring notes

10 With the tag selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Text, enter Seal existing doors and insulate, and click OK.

12 On the Edit toolbar, click

(Copy).

13 Select the tag, and click above the tag to place a copy.

Creating a Note Block | 589

14 With the copy selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

15 For Text, enter Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 16 For Tag, enter B. 17 Click OK. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.

19 On the toolbar, click

(Mirror), and on the Options Bar, clear Copy.

20 Select the tag on the left, and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building, as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image, position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays, and click.

590 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

21 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 22 Optionally, using the table as a reference, and moving counter-clockwise, continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration:
Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Repair as required. Saw cut existing brick wall. Clean cut and repair wall as required.

Create, format, and place a note block on a sheet
23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 24 In the New Note Block dialog, for Note block name, enter Exterior Construction Notes, and click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Tag, and click Add. Select Text, and click Add. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Tag.

Creating a Note Block | 591

■ ■

On the Formatting tab, for Heading, enter Mark, and for Alignment, select Center. On the Appearance tab, For Header text, verify Arial in the first field, enter 6 mm in the second field, and select Bold.

26 Click OK. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.

27 In the column header (text), enter Description. 28 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A103 - Elevations. 29 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Exterior Construction Notes, and drag it to the sheet.

30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet, and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.

33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt, and click Save.

592 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Using Drawing Lists
In this lesson, you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.

Creating a Drawing List
In this exercise, you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet.

2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Sheet Number, and click Add. Select Sheet Name, and click Add. On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field, select does not equal, and in the third field, enter T. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Sheet Number.

4 Click OK. The drawing list displays.

5 In the list title field, enter Sheet Index. 6 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet. 7 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Sheet Index, and drag it to the sheet.

Using Drawing Lists | 593

8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner, and expand the right column to accommodate the text.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames. On construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule, door frame schedule, and so on). NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.

Creating a Symbol Legend
In this exercise, you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Finally, you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Create a legend view
1 On the View menu, click New ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog, for Name, enter Typical Symbol Legend, and click OK.

594 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Add symbols to the legend
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view, selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

M_Section Head - Filled Level Head - Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote - Hexagon : Tag

Create a text type
5 On the Design Bar, click Text. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector, you create a text type with the necessary size. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.

6 On the Options bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate, for Name, enter Legend Text, and click OK. 9 For Text Font, select Arial. 10 For Text Size, enter 3mm, and click OK twice.

Add text to the legend
11 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected, and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. 13 Working from the top down, enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
■ ■ ■

Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag

Creating a Symbol Legend | 595

expand Sheets (all). and click to place it.Site Plan/Floor Plan.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. and double-click A101 . and click to place it. 16 In the Type Selector. 15 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 19 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. click Modify.Unit 18. 18 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. click Typical Symbol Legend. 17 On the Design Bar. 596 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A102 . select Viewport : No Titlemark. expand Legends.

click Legend Component. for Name. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click New ➤ Legend. enter 900 mm. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. Creating a Component Legend | 597 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 6 On the View Control Bar. For View. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.20 In the Type Selector. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 3 For Scale. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 5 On the Options Bar. select Section. and press ENTER. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.rvt. 21 On the Design Bar. select1 : 50. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. select Medium for Detail Level. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. select Viewport : No Titlemark. and click OK. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. For Host length.

verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and on the Options Bar. 598 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector.9 On the Design Bar. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. for Family. click Text. 10 Select the second wall. click Modify.

19 Enter the following text. The text note with leader is added to the legend. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. click to add text with a single-segment leader. for Leader. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. click to add text without a leader. Creating a Component Legend | 599 .13 On the Options Bar.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking.

right-click Sheets (all). Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 600 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . and click New Sheet. under Floor Plans. 29 In the project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. select 4th Floor Wall Types. The open drawings are both visible. 25 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Legends. and drag it to the new sheet. double-click Level 4. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click Modify to end the command. 23 In the Project Browser. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. drag it onto the sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. select Level 4.

32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Creating a Component Legend | 601 . 33 In the floor plan view. 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. select the Wall Type 2 component. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. click (Match Type). indicating that it captured the wall type properties. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region.

Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. select Medium for Detail Level. 36 On the View Control Bar. or changes in building material availability.35 Select the patio divider wall. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. You can create a sequence of revisions. 37 Optionally. In this exercise. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. These changes can be due to owner requests. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. you 602 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. contractor inquiries.

the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. if the active revision is number 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. the revision is locked and issued to the field. If you select By Sheet. 7 Under Visible. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. enter a date. Using the table. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared.use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. 5 For Description. For example. double-click Level 4. In most instances. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. 3 In the Revisions dialog. 2 On the Settings menu. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. When Issued is selected. click Revisions. Setting Up a Revision Table | 603 . When you use this option. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. If Visible is not selected. under Floor Plans. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.rvt. In general. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. yet as concise as possible.

but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. you make changes to the project floor plan. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 3 Select the divider. including revision number and revision date. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.rvt. under Floor Plans.8 Click OK. 5 Select the partition. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. click (Move). Revision clouds have read-only properties. move the cursor up. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 604 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . double-click Level 4.

Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds | 605 . click Modify. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. 8 In the drawing area.6 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click near the partition you moved. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. click Revision Cloud. click Finish Sketch.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click the Annotation Objects tab. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 16 Click OK. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. for Line Weight. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 4. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. you load a revision tag into the project. click Tag ➤ By Category. 606 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select 6. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.rvt.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

7 In the left pane of the dialog. you need to add one. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click to place the tag. click Tags. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 5 In the Tags dialog. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.4 On the Options Bar. Working with Revisions In this exercise. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table.Unnamed. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. 6 Click Load.rvt. Because you chose to number by project. You then issue a revision. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Training Files. 8 In the Tags dialog.rfa. and because the revision is the first in the project. scroll down to Revision Clouds. under Sheets. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Working with Revisions | 607 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click A107 . In the Tags dialog. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. You do this by issuing the revision. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. select Leader. you create a sheet view in your project. on which you place a revised view. 10 In the drawing area. click OK. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. the cloud is tagged as number 1. you prevent further changes to the revision. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar.

click New. for Visible. and click OK. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. NOTE After you issue a revision. 608 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. click Revisions. under Add. 6 In the Revisions dialog. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. You can continue to add revisions. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. click Revisions. select None for each issued revision. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. select Issued. you can no longer modify it. On the Settings menu.

and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and spreadsheets.9 Click OK. such as images.JPG. text. into a project. 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. you learn to import information from other applications. Importing Image Files In this exercise. Importing from Other Applications | 609 . and place it on a sheet. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets.Title Sheet.rvt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. double-click T .

doc text file in another window. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Select the text. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. click to add text without a leader. under Sheets. click Text. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. for Leader. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 3 On the Options Bar. 610 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.5 On the Design Bar. double-click T . Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. click Modify.

and click Save. This exercise demonstrates a common method. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. with the new text box still selected. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. click Desktop. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. for File name. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. Importing Spreadsheets | 611 . under Sheets. enter Fixture Schedule. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.Unit 18. This step has been completed for you. 5 Click OK. 4 Under Printer. 7 In the Revit MEP window. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.JPG. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. This process may vary from system to system. select the document writer. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit MEP.JPG. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. click Modify. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet.xls.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.mdi. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. for Name. click File menu ➤ Print. double-click A102 . 9 On the Design Bar. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. click Modify. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 3 In Microsoft Excel. and saved as Fixture Schedule.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

612 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .12 Click File menu ➤ Save.

or footprint. To effectively document this project. as well as a large lab building. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you break up the plan into sections. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.Using Dependent Views 11 In this tutorial. 613 . called dependent views. The large floor plan.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 614 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .

| 615 .

3 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. 6 In the drawing area. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. click Training Files. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.Aviary. 616 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. select the crop region. click Zoom To Fit. The dependent view opens. enter Level 2 . 5 Click in the drawing area. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click Dependent on Level 2. under Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. for Name. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. 4 In the Rename View dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. and click Rename.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 617 . 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. and the model crop is the interior crop region.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

enter Level 2 .9 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom To Fit. click Zoom To Fit. 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and on the Zoom flyout. right-click Level 2. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 10 On the Zoom flyout. click (Hide Crop Region). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. for Name. 14 Click in the drawing area.Labs. 15 Select the crop region. 11 In the Project Browser. 618 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .

The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 19 On the View Control Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. click Modify. click (Hide Crop Region). double-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. 18 On the Design Bar. click Matchline. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 619 . under Floor Plans.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 20 On the Zoom flyout.

24 On the Design Bar. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 620 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . click Finish Sketch. and click.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Click above the left corner of the lab building.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.

for Name. 33 In the Project Browser.Aviary. click the Annotation Objects tab. select Double Dash. 26 In the Object Styles dialog.Unnamed. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. and click OK. and click OK. click Level 2 . and drag it onto the sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 28 For Line Pattern. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. under Floor Plans. 31 In the Project Browser. 27 Under Matchline. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 621 . 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. expand Sheets. and click Rename. right-click A101 . select 9. enter Level 2 Aviary. for Line Weight.

38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. click Modify. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 39 On the Options Bar. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.Aviary is selected. for Target view. and place the Level 2 . double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans.Labs dependent view on the sheet. 622 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet.35 On the Design Bar. click View Reference. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 .

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 623 . 41 On the Options Bar.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 45 On the Zoom flyout. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. click Modify. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. double-click Level 2 .Aviary. 46 In the Project Browser. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 44 On the Design Bar. click (Show Crop Region). click Zoom To Fit.Labs. under Floor Plans. for Target view. 47 On the View Control Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2 .

Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. after modifying the annotation crop region. right-click. 49 If.48 Select the crop region. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. click the far right control. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 624 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .

53 In the Select Views dialog. 54 In the Project Browser. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 625 . you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale.51 On the View Control Bar. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 55 On the Zoom flyout. and click OK. and click Apply Dependent Views. 57 On the Zoom flyout. select all views in the list. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. click (Hide Crop Region). Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. right-click Level 2. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. click Zoom To Fit. expand Level 1. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser.

The matchline is already placed in the view. click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). right-click South Elevation. 2 In the Project Browser. The dependent view opens. and click OK.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. select the Crop Region. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 626 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 5 In the drawing area. right-click Dependent on South Elevation.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. expand South Elevation. enter South Elevation . and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views.Left. and double-click South Elevation. 3 In the Project Browser.

right-click A103 Unnamed. and drag it toward the center of the drawing.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. and drag it toward the center of the view. 11 Select the crop region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 9 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. for Name. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 627 . for Name. and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog. enter South Elevation .Right. click OK to accept the default titleblock. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. enter South Elevation. under Sheets. cropping the view to the lab building. and click OK. and click Rename. 16 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region). 7 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. cropping the view to the aviary. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click South Elevation. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

Left. and drag it onto the sheet. double-click South Elevation. under Elevations. and drag it onto the sheet. 22 On the Design Bar. click View Reference. click South Elevation . verify that Elevation: South Elevation . 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. click Modify.Right. for Target view. click South Elevation . under Elevations. under Elevations. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser.18 In the Project Browser.Left is selected. 628 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 25 On the Options Bar.

select Elevation: South Elevation . for Target view.Right. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 629 .28 On the Options Bar. double-click A103 . click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.South Elevation. under Sheets (all). 31 In the Project Browser.

630 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . Right-click the view.NOTE If the view references are not visible. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Select the crop region. and click Activate View. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

Viewing and Rendering 3 631 .

632 | Chapter 12 Viewing and Rendering .

you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. More specifically. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. 633 . and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views.Viewing 12 In this tutorial. how to control fill pattern colors.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . you learn how to access different views of the building model. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. click Training Files. including elevation and three-dimensional views. sections. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. 634 | Chapter 12 Viewing .rvt. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. expand Views (all). locate the Project Browser. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. You create elevations. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. and three-dimensional (3D) views. on the Standard toolbar. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser. and double-click East. expand Elevations.

Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. the east elevation. 6 Under Visibility. click Visibility/Graphics. click Model Graphics Style. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. and click Hidden Line. 7 Click OK. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. The default name of the view is {3D}. Exploring the Building Model | 635 . This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. This change is applied only to the active view. click the Annotation Categories tab. scroll down and clear Window Tags. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. click . This change is applied only in this elevation view.

and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. double-click My 3D View. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. 16 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. The view follows the movement of the cursor. click to reorient the view. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter My 3D View. click X to close the view. and expand 3D Views. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. . Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. expand Views (all).9 On the View toolbar. 18 In the Project Browser. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. 636 | Chapter 12 Viewing . . 12 Press and hold CTRL. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. and click OK. You can pan. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. zoom. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. Move the mouse to pan the view.

“Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 637. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Viewing_Exercise.rvt. outside of the dimension lines. click Camera. expand Views (all). you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. right-click in the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 637 . Cameras define the eye point. as shown in the following illustration. and click View. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. After you specify the second point (the view target). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. eye height. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and distance from the target. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click Level 1.

Move the cursor up.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Press and hold the left mouse button. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. click Dynamically Modify View. and sideways to see how the view changes. 5 On the View menu. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. down. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. 638 | Chapter 12 Viewing . Press and hold the left mouse button.

10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. Change the camera position. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. and target 12 On the Window menu. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 639 . Four views of the model display in the drawing area. 13 On the View menu. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Press and hold the left mouse button. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. height. click Tile.

under 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1. and click Show Camera. 16 In the Project Browser. 640 | Chapter 12 Viewing . double-click 3D View 1.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 15 In the Project Browser. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. double-click Level 1. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views.

17 In My 3D View. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. click Model Graphics Style. 20 On the View Control Bar. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. and click Element Properties. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 641 . In the Element Properties dialog. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. right-click. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). click to create a new 3D view. and click Shading. under Camera. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. Click OK. and move it to another location.

as shown in the following illustration. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. and click OK. A rotation tool is also displayed. A section box is displayed around the model. under Extents. 24 Click the section box. click View Properties. select Section Box. 22 On the View menu.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. 642 | Chapter 12 Viewing .

rvt. “Creating a Section View” on page 643. and rotate the section box around the model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Section. and maximize this view. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Section View | 643 . expand Floor Plans. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Creating a Section View In this exercise. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise.26 Click and hold the rotation tool.

3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. click Modify. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. 8 Select the section line. and click Find Referring Views. and double-click Section 1. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. 4 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1. expand Sections. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. double-click the section head. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click. 7 In the Go To View dialog. select the section view. and click Open View. or in the Project Browser. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. 644 | Chapter 12 Viewing . The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. View the section 5 To view the section.

under Floor Plans. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. Notice the change in section depth. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. click Elevation. 12 Select the section line. click Modify. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. m_Viewing_Exercise. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. double-click Level 1. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. double-click Level 1. move the cursor around the building model. Creating Elevation Views | 645 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. 14 On the Design Bar.9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 645. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Notice the change in the view direction. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. double-click Level 1. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. double-click Elevation 1 . under Elevations.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation.b. Do not select the arrow. Elevation 1 . place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. 10 In the Project Browser. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. 5 On the Design Bar. Elevation 1 . click Modify. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view.a.a by default.b. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 646 | Chapter 12 Viewing . zoom in. and click.

you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and other families. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. such as Brick on CMU. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. In addition. click Save As. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. This includes walls. For example. roofs. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. where each layer is assigned a different material. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. and applies to phasing override materials as well. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in this case. floors. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. click Training Files. in a compound wall.11 If you want to save your changes. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 647 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. and the insulation color to pink. on the File menu. a shade of gray. such as the one below.rvt. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. and open Common\c_Showroom.

2 On the Settings menu. expand Views (all). The surface pattern of the brick is black. and double-click 3D. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. 3 In the Materials dialog. click Color. click Materials.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . and click OK twice. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure.Brick for Name. 5 In the Color dialog. expand 3D Views. select Masonry .Brick for Name. select red. expand Sections (Section Head . The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. click Materials. select Masonry . 4 Under Cut Pattern.Filled). Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. 648 | Chapter 12 Viewing . expand Views (all).Level 3. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. 9 In the Materials dialog.

rvt. click View Properties. c_Showroom. The surface pattern of the brick is now white.10 Under Surface Pattern. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 649. expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View menu. and double-click Level 1. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. click Color. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 649 . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK twice. 11 In the Color dialog. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. expand Views (all). select white.

Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. click Edit/New. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. click Modify. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. select Solid fill for Name. 12 On the View Control Bar. and click OK three times. and click Element Properties. although they may have 650 | Chapter 12 Viewing . If you create more than one plan region in a file. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. By default. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. double-click Level 2. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. 10 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Save As. . 14 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click Fine. 7 In the Color dialog. select a shade of gray. click Detail Level. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. right-click. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

and you cannot control their visibility. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or pattern. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 651 . click Training Files. line color. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. refer to the online Help for more information. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit MEP files. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit MEP. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. line type.rvt.coincident edges.

and click View. and double-click Level 1. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. the top and bottom clip planes. click Plan Region. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. On the Options Bar. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar. click Lines. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. Plan regions have a single property. view range. expand Views (all). sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. and the view depth plane. which is similar to the view range for plan views. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. click . ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. In the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. 652 | Chapter 12 Viewing . the south elevation is also displayed. 3 In the Level 1 view.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.

and click Element Properties. and then click OK twice. 9 On the Design Bar.■ ■ On the Design Bar. 6 In the View Range dialog. under Extents. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. right-click. click Edit for View Range. 4 Select the plan region. The plan region displays as a dashed green line. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. click Modify. When you select the plan region. Press ESC to end the command. the line turns red. By selecting Parent View’s Level. 8 Click Apply. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. top and bottom clip planes. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 653 .

10 If you want to save your changes.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. on the File menu. 654 | Chapter 12 Viewing . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As.

and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit MEP 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit MEP that is used to produce rendered views. to place and render decals to create signs. and posters. 655 . billboards.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 13 In this tutorial.

you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. In this exercise. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. After you create the perspective view. 656 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. and create the perspective view that you want to render. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. When you complete these changes. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. the floor. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. you select a scene that defines the model environment.

click next to Texture to display the Material Library.Brick. 8 In the Materials dialog. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 657 . 9 Under AccuRender. click Training Files. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Materials.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit for Structure. verify that Co-house . and open Metric\m_Cohouse. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Masonry .Brick.rvt.Cavity Wall . and click the tab in the context menu. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. under Construction. click Wall. 3 On the Options Bar.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. right-click in the Design Bar. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. under Name. and click Edit/New. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click . 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time.

A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. expand Metals. under Name. and click Aluminum. expand Masonry and click Brick. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog.Running. click Edit for Structure. click Edit/New. 26 Click OK twice.Asphalt. 18 In the Materials dialog. for Layer 2. Polished and click OK. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. under Name. . enter Aluminum.200mm. click Modify. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step.Plain. select Polished. 24 In the Material Library. under _accurender. 22 In the New Material dialog. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. under _accurender. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. 12 Click OK twice. 21 In the Materials dialog. select Site . click next to Texture to display the Material Library. click Materials. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. 19 Click OK four times. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 Under Name. 23 Under AccuRender. and click . select Carib. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. click Duplicate. under Construction. 658 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 14 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 25 Under Name.

32 In the Materials dialog. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. click . 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. click Region Raytrace. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. Polished. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 659 . under Materials and Finishes. select Exterior under Type. under Name. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click No. and then click . click Edit/New. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. verify that New is selected. and click OK. select Aluminum.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. click in the Material field. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. 29 On the Options Bar. 33 Click OK three times. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. select the curtain wall mullion again. floor.

The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. you place two different types of trees on the building site. In a later exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. producing a photorealistic effect. Cnst. expand Floor Plans. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 660. when you render an exterior view of the model. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. expand Views (all).rvt. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. floor. m_Cohouse. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). 39 Proceed to the next exercise. 660 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click 1st Flr. 38 On the Design Bar.

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click . The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . click Site Component. Create a new type of tree. 4 In the Type Selector. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. and click to place a tree. and click Site Component. right-click in the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. select any of the deciduous trees. click Modify. Adding Trees to the Site | 661 .2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. and click Site.9 Meters. select M_Tree . Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names.

under accurender. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. under Other. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. select Oak. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. click in the Value field for Plant Name. select Black Oak for Type Comments.8 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. and click OK twice. Black. and place two black oak trees. and click OK. expand Trees and Shrubs. 662 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 13 Under Name. and click Deciduous. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. m_Cohouse. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 662. 12 In the Plant Library. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. under Identity Data. as shown in the following illustration. and then click display the Plant Library. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. click Edit/New. 15 Under Other. 10 In the Name dialog. enter Black Oak.

2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. The new perspective view is displayed. Creating a Perspective View | 663 . 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. Cnst.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. click Camera. view open. on the View tab of the Design Bar.

and click Show Camera. expand 3D Views. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. Cnst. view. Cnst. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 664 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . double-click 1st Flr. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr.

Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 665 . and environment settings that you use to render the view.rvt. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename. lighting. date. and click OK. enter Exterior. m_Cohouse. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. 8 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Exterior. you select a scene and specify time. right-click 3D View 1.7 In the Project Browser. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. place. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 665.

5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. click Settings. 7 Under Date. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. and click Sun. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 666 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Time. 8 Under Time. click the Solar Angles tab. 6 Select By Date. under Scene Settings. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time.

22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. click No. Rye. under Scene Settings. and click OK. and enter bo. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. click Raytrace. click . 20 In the Name list.) 14 Click OK. The Ground Plane tab displays. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. USA. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. and click OK. and select Boston.20 for Cloudiness. 19 In the Material Library. select Autumn for Plant Season. 11 Scroll down.9 Click the Place tab. under Scene Settings. 17 Under Advanced. 12 Click the Settings Tab. select Ground Plane. click Site. click Capture Rendering. 27 On the Options Bar. 21 Click OK twice. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. click Environment. under Background Color. select Good for Quality. 16 In the Environment dialog.00 (many clouds. 18 Click Material. 26 On the Design Bar. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 667 . 13 Enter . Dark. 10 Click in the Cities list. select Grass. click Image Size. under _accurender. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. MA.

and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved.30 On the Design Bar. To create the rendered scene. define the view and render scene settings. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). m_Cohouse. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. click Save As. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. Cnst. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. on the File menu. expand Renderings. and double-click 2nd Flr. 668 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. Adding RPC People In this exercise.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 32 If you want to save this exercise. and finally. expand Floor Plans. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 668.

6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. Adding RPC People | 669 . and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 7 Repeat steps 4 . 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. click Component. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. select Rotate after placement. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 670. m_Cohouse. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. 670 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .8 Proceed to the next exercise.

Cnst.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. The interior perspective is displayed. double-click 2nd Flr. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 671 . 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view.

right-click 3D View 1. 672 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click the dimensions for Size. and click OK. under Size. enter 229 mm for Width. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. enter 178 mm for Height. and click Rename.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.

14 On the Design Bar.9 In the Rename View dialog. Grips are displayed on the section box. 12 On the View menu. click Modify. under Extents. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 673 . select Section Box. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. and select the section box. and click OK. click to display the 3D view of the building model. enter Interior. A section box is displayed around the building model. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. click View Properties. 11 On the View menu. and click OK.

click the Solar Angles tab. select New. click Settings. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. 12 Scroll down. you create a render scene to specify the time. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. under Scene Settings. select Interior. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Environment. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 674. 14 Click Save. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. date. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. and enter Interior Scene for Name. place. and select Boston. and environment settings used to render the view. and click Save. 7 Select By Date. 4 Under Type. 9 Under Time. Time.rvt. on the Main tab. By limiting the geometry. USA. 674 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you reduce the rendering time. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. 13 Click the Settings tab. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and enter bo. under Scene Settings. 8 Under Date. 17 In the Environment dialog. under Background Color. and click Sun.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. m_Cohouse. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. click OK. MA. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 10 Click the Place tab. 11 Click in the Cities list. and click OK.

22 Click OK twice. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. Rye. m_Cohouse. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. such as windows and doors. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. 5 On the Design Bar. as daylight sources. click Daylights. select Ground Plane. click Radiate. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. click Site. double-click Interior. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 675. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. 19 Click Material. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. You can select families with transparent materials. under Use View’s Section Box. select Grass. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The Ground Plane tab displays. double-click {3D}.18 Under Advanced. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. click OK. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Name list. under 3D Views. select {3D}. Dark. 24 Under Scene Settings. 20 In the Material Library. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 675 . and click OK. select Summer for Plant Season.rvt. under accurender. Curtain Wall 1).

and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 9 If you want to save your changes. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. When radiate completes. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. which can take several minutes.The radiosity process. . 7 On the Design Bar. 676 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. click Raytrace. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. the following rendered view is displayed. on the File menu. begins. 10 Close the exercise file. 8 On the Options Bar. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps.

proceeds through the dining room. elevation.rvt. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. and ends in the far corner of the living room. but you can also define it in a 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. If you prefer to use Metric values. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. you must select or define a scene. or section view. and change unit formats as desired. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. The walkthrough path is a spline. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 677 . you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit MEP 2008. and open Common\c_Townhouse.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. In a plan view. click Training Files. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. click Settings ➤ Project Units. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit MEP software. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point. and double-click 1st Floor. click Walkthrough.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. expand Views (all). click . or the first key frame. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Walkthrough 1. of the walkthrough. on the Options Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and click the tab in the context menu. expand Walkthroughs. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 678 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 3 On the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room.

enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. 11 Under Change. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. If it is not. 9 On the Options Bar. and select the crop boundary. Creating a Walkthrough | 679 .The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 14 Click . verify Field of view is selected. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the View menu. click Edit Walkthrough. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. and click OK. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. select the crop boundary.

double-click 1st Floor. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. click . proceed to the next exercise. clear Far Clip Active. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. click Edit Walkthrough.rvt. c_Townhouse. 2 On the Options Bar. 17 Click . NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 680 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 1 for Frame.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 16 On the Options Bar. under Extents. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). and click OK. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 680. The walkthrough plays. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. press ESC.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 681 . Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip).The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. select Path for Controls. 6 On the Options Bar.

9 On the Options Bar. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. double-click Walkthrough 1. or with AccuRender raytracing. without opening Revit MEP 2008. hidden line. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 682. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. and click Save. 1 On the File menu. shaded with edges. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 2 In the Save As dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.7 Click the third key frame position. and then click to play the walkthrough. When you export the walkthrough. c_Townhouse. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. and click OK. select <Shading> for Display mode. under Walkthroughs. 4 Under Format. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. If you are unsure of what option to use. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. shaded. The AVI is recorded. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 682 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 3 Under Output Length. specify 15 for Frames per Second. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 5 In the Video Compression dialog.rvt. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration.

and save the exercise file with a unique name.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. reducing the size of the image. 8 If you want to save this exercise. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. specifying the number of frames. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. Recording the Walkthrough | 683 . and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. click Save As. on the File menu.

684 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

More specifically. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. In this tutorial. 685 . You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define.Creating Solar Studies 14 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.

■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis.rvt. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement.Courtyard View In this exercise. expand Views (all). as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. click Camera.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. expand Floor Plans. and double-click 01 Entry. Creating a Solar Study . 686 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. A 3D view is created. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.

rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. as shown. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. under Floor Plans. if necessary. 10 On the File menu. 9 In the Rename View dialog. enter Solar Study . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 6 On the Design Bar. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 687 . “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 687. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view.4 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Save As. click to reorient the view. you create a section cutaway view. and click Rename. 7 Click the view boundary to select it.Courtyard View. as shown. click Modify. right-click 3D View 1. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog.

688 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK.3 On the Design Bar. click 10 On the View toolbar. click . 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 5 On the Design Bar. click Section. to reorient the view. right-click Section 1. 6 To view the section. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. and click Rename. double-click the section head. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 7 In the Project Browser. expand Sections. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.

select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry. you create a plan cutaway view. and under Orient to a View. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. right-click {3D}. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 689. then select Medium. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. 15 In the Rename View dialog. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. including the house. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. do not display many elements in 3D. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 On the View Control Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. On the Annotation Categories tab. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 689 . to expand the dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. 17 To hide the section box. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. click Modify. as shown. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Save. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. then Fine. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. and click Rename. Typical plan views. 14 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. In some cases. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 18 On the File menu.

4 In the Project Browser. 690 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. click . click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. as shown. as shown. 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. and click Rename. and under Orient to a View. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. to reorient the view. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. and click OK. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar. click 8 On the View toolbar. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building.

17 On the View Control Bar. click Save. under 3D Views. right-click {3D}. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 691 . 16 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. so you can see into the building from the top.15 Select the Roof. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 20 On the View Control Bar. 21 On the File menu. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study .

and time. For the Multi-Day solar study. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. CA. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. enter Summer Solstice. 692 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . You can create a still. MA. USA. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. 9 In the Name dialog. expand 3D Views.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. you specify the location. date range. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. 10 Under Place. and time range. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. you specify the location. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Click the Single-Day tab. single-day. Creating Solar Studies .Boston. and click OK. leave the slider at 50. expand Views (all). or multi-day solar study. date. USA is selected. click . . for City. click . Los Angeles. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. select Los Angeles. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. For this study. and double-click Solar Study . and click Duplicate. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . For the Single-Day solar study. 3 Select Cast Shadows. 2 On the View Control Bar.

and click OK. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 693 . 6 On the View Control Bar. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. Los Angeles. Under Frame. 14 In this case. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter 20 and press ENTER. select June 22. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. click . . click . verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 2006. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. for Date. Los Angeles. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 19 On the File menu. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. and click OK.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. You can select the level to be used for shadow display.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. click OK. and click OK. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ For Time Interval. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 693. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. select Winter Solstice. Clear Ground Plane at Level. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select December 22. enter Winter Solstice. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. under Frame. 2006. For Time Range. and click Duplicate. 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . click To display the next key frame.Courtyard View is currently displayed. Los Angeles is selected. click Save. on the Single-Day tab. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. confirm that Summer Solstice. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 16 In the Name dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. enter 10 and press ENTER.

click . PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. and click OK. Click and enter Dining.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The solar study animation plays. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.■ To display the next sequential frame. click . approximately as shown. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. 694 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . select Summer Solstice. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. under Floor Plans. click Text. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. double-click 01 Entry. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View Control Bar. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Click outside of the text box to end the command. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click . click To play the animation from start to finish. 14 On the Options Bar. on the Single-Day tab. . You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Los Angeles. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. approximately as shown.

10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. click . and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. Exporting the Study as AVI | 695 . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. as shown. click . as shown. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click OK. Los Angeles.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. select Section Boxes. on the Single-Day tab. 11 To display the section box. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. On the Options Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. expand 3D Views. click Lines. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab.

clear Section Boxes. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. and click OK. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 696 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . 14 Click outside of the section box. verify that the value is set to 15. To maintain the proportions of the frame. For Save as type. enter 450 in the first field (width). and enter 5 to 50. Under Output Length. Under Format. select the section box. verify that Hidden Line is selected.12 In the drawing area. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. For Frames per second.Los Angeles. For File name. if necessary. as shown. for Model Graphics Style. select Frame range. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. 15 To hide the section box. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. For Dimensions. On the Annotation Categories tab. select AVI Files. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

click Save. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 697. click Save. enter 450 in the first field (width). 2 On the View Control Bar. for Compressor. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. For Dimensions. 20 On the File menu. such as JPEG. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. To view the animation. TIFF. BMP. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings.Los Angeles. For Frames per second. NOTE When you export to PNG. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Save. you open each image. select PNG. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 In the Save As dialog. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. click OK. Under Format. on the Single-Day tab. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. and click OK. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. select Frame range. Los Angeles. or any single-frame format. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select Winter Solstice. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 697 . click . and click OK. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. or GIF. depending on the Frame Range. For Save as type. For File name. or frame. Under Output Length. and enter 5 to 10. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. of the animation separately. verify that the value is set to 15. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. In this example. 8 In the Save As dialog. for Model Graphics Style. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file.

2 Select the section box in the drawing area. 698 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser.9 On the File menu.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. under 3D Views. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. click Save.

5 Select the roof. as shown. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 699 . and on the View Control Bar. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top.

11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . for Compressor. and click OK. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). under Sun and Shadows Settings. 18 On the File menu. click the Multi-Day tab. and click Duplicate. For Time Interval. specify 2:00 pm. click Save. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. 700 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. clear Section Boxes. and click Save.Los Angeles . USA. for File name enter 2pm .Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. In the Save As dialog. 8 On the View Control Bar. click OK. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 17 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North.Week Interval. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. select One week. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Click the Desktop icon. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. and click OK.Boston. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. For Time. 12 In the Name dialog. MA. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 16 In the Video Compression dialog.

select Summer Solstice. select Cast Shadows. click Apply. 9 Under Date and Time. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. Then. click . click the Still tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click OK. 11 Under Date and Time. change the time back to 12:00 PM. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. For example. on the Still tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. Orienting to True North | 701 .rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click . 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 11:00 AM for time. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. In this exercise. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and select Winter Solstice. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM.

under Floor Plans. and click OK. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. under Graphics. In the Element Properties dialog. click the Still tab. and click OK.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the project rotates in the view. and select Winter Solstice. for Orientation. click OK. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. and select View Properties. click . 702 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . double-click 01 Entry. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. select True North. in the Angle from Project to True North field. On the Options Bar.

22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. In the Save As dialog. and click Apply. click the Still tab. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Save as type. for File name. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. click OK. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. are saved with the project. including the angle from True North. Los Angeles. verify that AVI Files is selected. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Single-Day tab.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. select Summer Solstice. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click . and click OK. 21 On the View Control Bar. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click Summer Solstice. Orienting to True North | 703 . 19 In the Project Browser. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655 for additional information on rendering. Right-click in the drawing area. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click Save. for Dimensions. and select View Properties. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. under 3D Views. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. under 3D Views. 29 On the File menu.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. On the Options Bar. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. click Raytrace. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. 2 In the Project Browser. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. for Orientation. Rendered views do not have this limitation. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry.■ Under Format. On the Options Bar. 704 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . under Graphics. and click OK. select Draft (75 dpi). Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. and exporting it as a JPEG image. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. Since a rendered image is temporary. enter 600 in the first field. click Save. Click the Desktop icon. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. for Resolution. select Project North. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. 28 Once you are finished with the study. and click OK. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 1 In the Project Browser. click GO. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. for Compressor. capturing it. for Scene. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog.

On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. under Renderings. for Save as Type. click Capture Rendering. click Save. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. click GO. click Export Image. and click Save. In the Save As dialog. select Presentation (300 dpi). Rendering an Interior View | 705 . 7 Review some captured images of the building. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. for Resolution. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. The scene is rendered in high resolution. select JPEG.■ ■ On the Options Bar. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. In the Project Browser.

706 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .

and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. To express texture beyond material specifics. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. Whether the audience is the general contractor. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. a consultant. an outside reviewer. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit MEP can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655. For the realistic approach. and Section Boxes. the Linework Tool. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. or the client. sections. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. and details. In this series of exercises." In Revit MEP. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. type. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. elevations. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. there are several options for expressing the architecture. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. Advanced Model Graphics.Presentation Views 15 In this tutorial. A majority of tools in Revit MEP 2008 are intended to describe number." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. length. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 707 . In this tutorial. you explore the stylistic approach.

708 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Co-house.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Using the pre-built building model.

you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. right-click 2nd Flr. In the left pane of the Open dialog. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. you create a copy of the plan.rvt. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 709 . Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. Cnst. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. you create a presentation floor plan. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened.

Down Arrow. dimensions. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. click the Annotation Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Scale control and select 1:100. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 8 Click OK. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. click in the drawing area. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Notice that no annotations display in this view. Up Arrow. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. expand the Stairs category. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu.2 In the Project Browser. exit the menu. click Save As. this represents the view getting smaller. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. and clear DOWN Text. UP Text. 7 Under Visibility. under Floor Plans. 10 On the File menu. and click Rename. Cnst. 710 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . This turns off the visibility of all tags. elevations. sections. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. and so on in this view.

you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. the darker the shadows. modify. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.11 In the Save As directory. Time and Place. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. and click Save. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings.rvt. Within a Project. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click OK. 5 Under Settings. Under Shadows Properties. click for Place. 6 Under Settings. At that place. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. navigate to the folder of your choice. on the Still tab. double-click it in the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Place tab. select By Date. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 711 . Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. 8 Select Boston. you can create. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. 2 On the View Control Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. USA for City. click . ■ Under Intensity. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. select Sun and Shadow Settings. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. specify 35 for Shadow. The higher the number. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 711. MA.

This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar.NOTE For this step. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 713. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. however. and click OK. under Sun and Shadows Settings. click OK. click Save. 17 On the File menu. clear Ground Plane at Level. 11 Click OK. Cnst. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. you can enter any city you wish. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. under Settings. 712 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and select 1st Flr. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. be aware that if you enter a different city.

click Modify. and click Add View to Sheet. click Sheet. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and notice a view title displays. and click View. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click to place it. 6 On the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. click Add View. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not available. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 4 In the Views dialog. select Arch Portrait. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. right-click the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 713 .

Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. 12 In the Name dialog. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. and click Activate View. click Edit/New. 714 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. click OK. For this analytique. enter Presentation. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click Duplicate. select No for Show Title. and click OK. To accomplish this.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique.

click . and the boundary of the region. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. click Filled Region. click . use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. fill properties. click Edit/New. under Graphics. and select Chain. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. select Invisible Lines. click Duplicate. 17 In the Type Selector. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 26 In the Type Properties dialog.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. When you are finished drawing the chain. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 25 In the Name dialog. If necessary. 18 On the Options Bar. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 20 On the Options Bar. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. and click OK. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 715 . click Region Properties. click . TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. for Fill Pattern. 22 On the Design Bar. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. enter Solid Black. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available.

under Name.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 716. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. scroll down. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. select Solid Fill. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. under Identity Data. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 34 On the File menu. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click Save. click OK. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. 716 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. and click View Properties. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.

This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. under Pattern Overrides. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Views (all). click in the drawing area. and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click Override. and click OK. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. right-click South. clear Visible. under Visibility. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. on the Model Categories tab. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 717 . and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. expand the Doors category. exit the menu. right-click Copy of South. expand Elevations. scroll up. and clear Elevation Swing.rvt. under Elevations. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Presentation South Elevation. 9 Click OK. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click in the Walls row. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu.

you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Time and Place. click Duplicate. 718 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 20 On the File menu. By changing the angle of the sun. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. click Save. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. 12 Under Shadow Properties. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. select Cast Shadows. specify 35 for Shadow. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. under Settings. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 16 In the Name dialog. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 13 Under Intensity. select By Date. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 718. click . and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

3 In the Views dialog.Presentation. click Add View.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click A105 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Notice the viewport displays a view title. and click Add View to Sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 719 . under Views (all).

720 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click Modify. 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Notice the view title no longer displays. select Viewport: Presentation.5 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar.

you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise.8 On the File menu. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 721 . 9 Proceed with the next lesson. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 721. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. click Save.

To accomplish this. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Sections (Callout 1). Cnst. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 4 Add the section shown below. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall).rvt. 722 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . To fit correctly in the analytique. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Section. Section 2 is added to the building model. double-click 1st Flr. and use the flip arrows if necessary. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. select 1: 100 for Scale. and double-click Section 2.

Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Section 2. click the Model Categories tab. select 1 : 100 for Scale. double-click Presentation Section 2. click Modify. click Callout. enter Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. 12 In the Project Browser. under Pattern Overrides. click Override. 15 Under Visibility. click in the Walls row. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 723 . This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 7 On the Options Bar. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Callout 1). and click Rename. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. clear Visible. 10 In the Project Browser. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. and click OK. 11 In the Rename View dialog.

clear Annotation Crop. scroll up. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. clear Crop Region Visible. 724 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. expand the Doors category. Revit MEP displays 2 boundaries. When you select the crop boundary. under Extents.17 Under Visibility. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click . 20 Click OK. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. and click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. 22 On the Options Bar.

click the Advanced Model Graphics control. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 725. Click Apply. open the Project Browser and. Under Intensity. double-click Presentation Section 2. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view.rvt. 2 On the View Control Bar. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. Under Shadows Properties. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. under Sections (Callout 1). click Save. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 725 .24 On the File menu. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select Cast Shadows. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. In addition. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. specify 35 for Shadow. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast.

7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Directly. select Override Silhouettes. and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under Silhouette Edges. click Save. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. Silhouette Edges. click . TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 727. click OK. and click OK. select Relative to View. under Settings. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. was added to this dataset for training purposes. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar.In the steps that follow. click Duplicate. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. NOTE The line style. 11 On the File menu. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. 726 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 10 Under Silhouette Edges. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 5 In the Name dialog. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 727 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. click Modify. double-click A105 .Presentation. select Viewport: Presentation. select Section: Presentation Section 2.rvt. click Add View. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. and click to place the selected view. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. The view title no longer displays. and click Add View to Sheet. under Sheets (all). 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector.

move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. under Sections (Callout 1). To rotate an object. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. click . and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. In the steps that follow. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. Using a clock as a reference. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 728 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and press ENTER. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. you click to specify the start radius.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 2. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view.

and drag it up and to the left as shown.Presentation. 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. under Sheets (all). Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 729 . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. the callout rotates 180 degrees. Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. double-click A105 .After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.

click Save. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views.15 On the Design Bar. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 730. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the New View Template dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the View Templates dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. click Modify. 16 On the File menu. 730 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 17 Proceed with the next exercise. 2 On the View menu. After applying the view template to a new section view. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. enter Presentation.rvt. and click OK. click Create View Template from View.

7 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. and click OK. Notice the furniture. 12 In the Views dialog. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. and click Activate View. 16 On the View menu. enter Presentation Section 1. and click Rename. you can simply apply the presentation view template. double-click A105 . annotations. select Viewport: Presentation. right-click Copy of Section 1. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. right-click Section 1. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click View Properties. Working with a Presentation View Template | 731 . you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 15 Right-click the viewport. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. 6 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). Now. and elevation swings no longer display. and click Add View to Sheet. under Sections (Type 1).Presentation. select Presentation. click Apply View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Sections (Type 1). click Add View. lighting fixtures. select Section: Presentation Section 1. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. 732 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . traditional analytiques contain a detail. click Save. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. and click Deactivate View. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 732. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 20 On the File menu. such as a tracery window or column capital.17 In the Element Properties dialog. In this exercise. under Graphics. 18 Right-click the viewport.

3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. click Callout. and click OK. enter Presentation Callout.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click Rename. under Sections (Type 1). click Modify. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Rename View dialog. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. After you add the callout. under Sections (Callout 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. right-click Callout of Section 1. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. Working in a Callout Analytique | 733 . select the callout. double-click Presentation Callout. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Section 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt.

clear Annotation Crop.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 734 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . clear Crop Region Visible. and click View Properties. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. under Extents. 8 Right-click.

Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. and click OK. and move it into the position shown below. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. double-click A105 . click View Properties. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. select Custom for View Scale. Working in a Callout Analytique | 735 . select Section: Presentation Callout. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. click Add View. 12 In the Views dialog.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser.Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. select Viewport: Presentation. under Sheets (all). 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Deactivate View. click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Activate View. 17 On the View menu.

select Solid Black for Type. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. In the steps that follow. and click OK. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. click Region Properties. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. double-click Presentation Callout. 736 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. click Filled Region.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. under Sections (Callout 1). 23 On the Design Bar. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. When finished. activate the viewport. and make adjustments as necessary.

28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. and click Activate View. Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. under Sheets (all). Working in a Callout Analytique | 737 . 29 On the Options Bar. double-click A105 . click Filled Region. click . and sketch the rectangle shown below.26 On the Project Browser.

and click OK. 31 On the View menu. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click View Properties.30 On the Design Bar. under Extents. 33 Select the crop region. 738 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click Finish Sketch. select Crop Region Visible. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.

You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. under Extents. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 739. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click View Properties. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. 37 On the File menu.34 On the View menu. and click Deactivate View. click Save. clear Crop Region Visible. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 739 . and apply shadows to the views. 38 Proceed with the next lesson.

double-click Isometric. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 7 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click . Under Shadows Properties. 3 On the View Control Bar. specify 35 for Shadow. Under Intensity. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views.rvt. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 2 On the View menu. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. 740 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . select Cast Shadows. click Orient ➤ Southwest. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click 1 : 200. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. click the Scale control.

and click Rename. 14 In the Project Browser. under Silhouette Edges. select Section Box. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. under 3D Views. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. double-click Isometric 2. enter Isometric 1. and click OK. and click OK. Select Relative to View. 9 Click OK. under Settings. under 3D Views. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 1. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 16 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. enter Isometric 2.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Rename. under Extents. under 3D Views. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 18 On the View menu. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 741 . 13 In the Rename View dialog. Select 1st Flr. Select Ground Plane at Level. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. select Override Silhouettes. Cnst. in the list. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. right-click Isometric. 15 In the Project Browser. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. click View Properties.

20 Select the section box. right-click Isometric 2. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. When you are finished. 23 In the Project Browser. click Modify on the Design Bar. under 3D Views. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. make a duplicate of the view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. 742 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . under 3D Views. and click Rename. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. 22 In the Project Browser. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol.

24 In the Rename View dialog. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 25 In the Project Browser. either adjust the plane location. 29 Select the section box. enter Isometric 3. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 34 In the Project Browser. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. In such a case. double-click Isometric 2. under Sheets (all). double-click Isometric 3. under 3D Views. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. the stairs and railings may display. select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. When you are finished. under 3D Views. clear Section Boxes. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. clear Section Boxes. Notice the section box no longer displays. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 743 . 31 To hide the section box. Next. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. double-click A105 . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 26 To hide the section box. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. in the Type Selector. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. click Modify on the Design Bar.Presentation. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box.

drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. 744 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 36 In the Project Browser. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. Notice the filled region partially covers the view.35 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.

The image below shows the lines redrawn. click Region Properties. and click OK. click Lines. 47 On the Design Bar. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. under Graphics. 39 On the Design Bar. This will make it easier to draw lines. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. 45 On the Design Bar. select Concrete for Type. click Edit. click Region Properties. 43 On the Design Bar. select Solid Black for Type. and click Deactivate View. and click Activate View. select Transparent for Background. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 745 . 44 Using the drawing tools.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 42 Click OK twice. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Select the poche filled region. click Finish Sketch. and then click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar.

under Floor Plans. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. you add it to the presentation sheet. double-click 1st Flr.49 On the File menu.rvt. a cutaway perspective view. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. click Camera. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 746. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Cnst. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you create the final view for the analytique. click Save. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. then you specify the eye direction and range. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. 746 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .

6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.The view opens immediately. Under Shadows Properties. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Under Intensity. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 747 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click . Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify 35 for Shadow.

under Silhouette Edges. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. select Section Box. click View Properties. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. 748 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Notice the controls that display on each plane. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. 12 Select the section box. and click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. select Override Silhouettes. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. and click OK. under Extents. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. A section box now cuts through the building model.

On the Annotation Categories tab. click Size. and click OK. select Scale (locked proportions). you must specify the actual size of the image. clear Section Boxes. Clear Crop Region Visible. double-click A105 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 749 . drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. 18 To hide the crop region.Presentation. and click OK. 19 To hide the section box. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 21 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ View Properties. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 On the Options Bar. Because scale does not apply to perspective views.14 Select the crop boundary. After placing it. under Change. enter 165 mm for Width. under Sheets (all). 17 Under Model Crop Size.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Save. and click OK. and click OK. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . click Edit/New. 2 On the Options Bar. 750 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 5 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. under Text. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. click OK. click Text. click Duplicate. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.22 On the File menu. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Title. click Edit/New.rvt. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Description. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 750. specify a text size of 40 mm. specify a text size of 6 mm. select Text : Title. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. under Text. select the same font as the title. select a font. and click OK. 9 In the Name dialog.

15 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. select Text : Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 18 On the File menu. Annotating the Analytique | 751 . click Save.

752 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .

Creating Families 4 753 .

754 | Chapter 16 Creating Families .

Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. each with a different size.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit MEP to help you manage your data and make changes easily. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit MEP 2008 are “family based. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. 755 . material set. In this tutorial. shape. thus the term family. they are still related and come from a single source. Even though various types within a family can look completely different.

For example. and partition wall styles. for example.rfa extension. There are. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit MEP recognize it as a particular component type. Standalone families include columns. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. The basic walls system family. Using the Family Editor. In this lesson. while many more are stored in component libraries. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . and when and how to use it. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. 756 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . Revit MEP has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit MEP and comprise principle building components such as walls.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit MEP is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. and furniture. however. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. such as a dome roof. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. floors. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. You also learn about the Family Editor. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. exterior. Walls. exceptions to this rule. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. because there is only one file to track. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit MEP and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. and roofs. has wall types that define interior. You can load them into projects. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . generic. This makes file management much easier. Host-based families have components that require hosts. floors. but you cannot create new system families. foundation. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components.rfa extension. In addition. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. and roofs are examples of these types of families. transfer them from one project to another. trees. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project.

You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. and also a standalone furniture family component. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. how to access it. for example.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. you learn about the Family Editor. such as plan. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. However. You create in-place families only within the current project. 2 On the File menu. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. if you change the original family. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. To add a family to your project. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. Load Family command on the File menu. and when to use it. or 3D. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. Introduction to the Family Editor | 757 . you can drag it into the document window. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. you learned about the different types of Revit MEP families and when to use them. In the final exercise. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. elevation. After the family has been loaded in the project. custom wall treatments. or you can load it using the Load From Library. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. it is saved with the project. In this section. as well as the level of detail associated with that view.

In this exercise. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. you learn when to use the Family Editor. such as newsgroups. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. presume it is a bay window that you require.rfa extension and it will open Revit MEP in the Family Editor. and click Open. it should be available within the Type Selector. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. if you have exhausted your external resources. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. how to access it. In this case. Within the Windows® environment. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 5 Finally. you can double-click any file with an . 758 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. With Revit MEP open. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. When the family opens. modify it as needed. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. you can click File ➤ Open. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. and click Open. consider checking the web library and other web resources. If you find a close match. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 3 Next. and then load it into the project. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. it opens within the Family Editor. To start a new family. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. select the appropriate template. navigate to a family file. open it in the Family Editor.

you learn how to create a different type of component. You create a furniture family. When you create an in-place family. you create it within the project file. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you create an in-place family. and several annotation families. not within the Family Editor. a lighting fixture. you learn how to create specific Revit MEP 2008 families. In addition.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. In each lesson. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. Using the installed templates. 759 .

you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively.Creating a Door Family In this lesson. and thickness. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. height. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. 760 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The door type has a variable height and width.

6 Maximize the window. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. and represent the door opening profile. click Tile. click Training Files. Level. Labelled dimensions. Floor Plan: Ref. click Symbolic Lines. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 761 . 9 In the Type Selector. 2 On the File menu. are also displayed. 5 On the Window menu. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice the four tiled views. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template.rft. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. click . click New ➤ Family. part of the door properties. 4 On the View menu. select Doors [projection]. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. 7 Enter ZF.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families.

14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 762 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. select Thickness for Label. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. 17 On the Options Bar. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. select Width for Label.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 763 . 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width.

and select the command from the menu. 23 On the Options Bar. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. click the down arrow button. click . When drawing an arc from center and end points. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. select Plan Swing [cut]. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. as shown. 21 On the Design Bar.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. 22 In the Type selector. 24 Enter SI. along with the witness line controls. In the image below. 764 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you first specify the arc center. click Symbolic Lines. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. then you specify each end point. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location.

Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. double-click Exterior. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 765 . 2 On the Design Bar. and click . under Specify a new Work Plane. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. under Elevations. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. click Set Work Plane.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 765. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. 5 On the Design Bar. enter 50 mm for Depth. click Lines.

11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. click Finish Sketch. 10 On the Design Bar. double-click Left.8 On the Design Bar. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. then click to specify the dimension witness line. 766 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. click Dimension. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations.

and Fine are selected. select Front/Back. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 767 . and When cut in Plan/RCP. select Thickness for Label. Left/Right. and click OK.12 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. double-click Ref. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 13 On the Options Bar. click Visibility. and clear Plan/RCP. under View Specific Display. 19 Under Detail Levels. click Modify. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Medium. verify that Coarse. 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify and select the dimension. 17 On the Options Bar. Level.

for Material. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. you assign a material to the door leaf. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 768. click Materials. and click OK.Red/Stained. click Duplicate. select Oak Door for Name. click for Texture. click 17 In the Materials dialog box. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. and click OK. 768 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Dark. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. click OK. 7 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. select Panel for Subcategory. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. click OK. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. 13 On the Design Bar. enter Oak Door for Name. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. click . select Oak Door. under Materials and Finishes. click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. 6 Click OK. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. 4 In the Materials dialog box. 15 On the Options Bar. It also defines its appearance when rendered. under Name. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click . click Modify.20 On the Options Bar. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. under AccuRender. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. for Material. 2 In the Materials dialog box. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box.No Gloss. and click OK. click . 3 In the New Material dialog box.

Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 769 . under 3D Views. and select Shading with Edges. click the Model Graphics Style control.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. double-click View 1. under Views (all). 21 On the View Control Bar.

enter 75 mm for Frame Width. 24 On the Design Bar. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 2000 mm for Height. Under Other. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. click Family Types. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. Click Apply. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. 770 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. Under Other.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. “Defining New Door Types” on page 770 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. Enter 1000 mm for Width. 3 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 27 Click OK. under Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click New. In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. enter 2500 mm for Height. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. By flexing the new component.

and click OK. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. Click Apply. Enter 750 mm for Width. click New. 15 In the New Project dialog box. 19 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Project.rfa. Enter 1220 mm for Width. 9 In the Name dialog box. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.rte. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. select it. and click Open.rfa. Training Door. click Browse. under Template file. 12 On the File menu. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. Click Apply. click Save. Defining New Door Types | 771 . click New ➤ Project. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. Define the second new door type. click Wall. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. Click Apply. enter 2100 mm for Height. 11 Click OK. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. 20 In the Open dialog box. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2134 mm for Height. click New. and click OK. Enter 925 mm for Width. Define the third new door type. click Door. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. Training Door.4 In the Family Types dialog box. click Load. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. enter 2000 mm for Height. 8 Under Family Types. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 17 Under Create new. 6 In the Name dialog box. 5 Under Family Types.

772 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 In the Type Selector. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown.23 On the View toolbar. click Door. 24 On the View Control Bar. click . select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 25 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 28 In the Type Selector. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. and select Shading with Edges.

Finally. and mullion offset.30 In the Type Selector. glazing and mullions as extrusions. and create the window sash as a sweep. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. and specify values for the window width. This completes the lesson. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. 32 You can close all files without saving. default sill height. Creating a Window Family | 773 . You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. You create the window frame. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. Creating a Door Family. height.

and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable.rft. 2 On the File menu. 7 Enter ZF. are also displayed. equally spaced vertical mullions. 4 On the Window menu. When you add labels to dimensions. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. Labelled dimensions. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Height and Default Sill Height. The window type has a variable height and width. 774 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . part of the window properties. Four views are tiled on your display. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. click New ➤ Family. 5 On the View menu. 8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. click Training Files. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. The label name. is one of the type parameters. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. you specify the parameters for the new window family. also one of the window properties. click Tile.

Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 775 . 10 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. Change the height and width values again. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 775. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. then sketching the sweep profile.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. This is the starting point for the new window. and click Apply. click Family Types. Enter 1800 mm for Width. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1300 mm for Height. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. 12 Click OK. Click Apply. This process is called “flexing the model. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click Apply.

776 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. Snap the cursor to each corner. select Elevation: Right. and select 1:10. click the Scale control. click Sketch 2D Path. click Sketch Profile. 9 On the View Control Bar. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. click Finish Path. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep.

13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 12 On the Options Bar. and select the dimension. click Modify. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 777 . 14 On the Design Bar.The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. click . click Ref Plane. 15 On the Options Bar. select Prefer: Wall faces. click Dimension. and specify an offset of 50 mm. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. 17 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar.

NOTE When you sketch the frame profile.18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. enter Sash for the Name. the exact dimensions are not critical. under Identity Data. click Modify. select Chain and click . However. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 On the Design Bar. 24 Below the red dot. click Lines. and click OK. click . click Modify. 778 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the reference plane. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. 20 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. 25 On the Design Bar. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar.

click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 779 . and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. When the lock displays. and drag it to the interior face of the wall.26 Select the right edge of the frame section. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. When the lock displays. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. When the lock displays. 28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane.

TIP After adding the dimension. as shown. click Dimension. Modify each dimension if necessary. click Modify. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. and specify the dimension value.29 On the Design Bar. 780 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select the line you want to move.

Next. When the lock displays. expand 3D Views. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. click Finish Profile. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. 35 On the Design Bar. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays.Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. click the lock to constrain the present value. under Views (all). spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 781 . 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. and double-click View 1. click . If necessary. zoom out until it displays. When the lock displays. this is the top of the window opening. click the lock to constrain the present value. 36 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. 33 On the Tools toolbar. 37 In the Project Browser.

under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. and select the option. under Elevations. click . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. and select Lock. and enter . double-click Exterior. 2 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. click Set Work Plane. 4 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. Chain of walls or lines. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 782. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. and click OK.38 In the Project Browser. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame.45 mm for Depth. 782 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . press TAB to cycle through the selection options. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.

8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle.50 mm for Offset. set the following options: Click . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. 9 On the Design Bar. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 783 . and lock icons display on each line. click Finish Sketch. ■ ■ Enter . ■ Click . Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar.The entire sash outline is selected.

10 In the Project Browser. 784 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click View 1. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 784. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. double-click Right. 11 In the Project Browser. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. under 3D Views. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. The window sash extrusion is now complete. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.

click Ref Plane. under Elevations.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 785 . 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. double-click Right. as shown. 2 On the Design Bar. click . and enter 30 mm for Offset.

click . 9 On the Options Bar.5 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click . press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. under Identity Data. and click to create the glass boundary. enter -12 mm for Depth. under Elevations. and select Lock. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. 786 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 On the Design Bar. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. double-click Exterior. click Lines. 8 Select the reference plane. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. click Dimension.

click Finish Sketch. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Right. 20 Select the glass extrusion. sash.18 On the Design Bar. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. under Identity Data. and click OK. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. After the family is loaded into a project. View the window model with frame. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 787 . click . 21 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. under Elevations.

26 In the Family Types dialog box. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. For example. Click Apply. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. under 3D Views. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters.24 In the Project Browser. enter 1500 mm for Height. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. Under Other. click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. double-click View 1. NOTE After flexing the model. 788 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Enter 2000 mm for Width. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 789 . Click OK. under Elevations. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 789. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. Under Other. 28 Proceed to the next exercise.27 In the Family Types dialog box. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. 2 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Ref Plane. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. the exact location is not critical. double-click Exterior. Click Apply. enter 1000 mm for Height. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions.

Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values. as shown. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it.4 On the Design Bar. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. After adding the dimension. 790 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values. click Dimension. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal.

. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. Click OK. select Family parameter.Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. select <Add parameter.> for Label. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select Dimensions. under Dimensions. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 791 . enter Mullion Offset for Name. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. Under Group parameter under. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.. 11 On the Design Bar. Under Parameter Data. click Modify. and click OK. click Family Types. Select Instance.

16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 14 Click the dimension value. 17 On the Options Bar. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. As you did before. 18 On the Design Bar. move the dimension value as shown.Notice the dimension value becomes editable. and enter 350 mm as the new value. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. select Mullion Offset for Label. 792 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 20 On the Design Bar.

After you complete the sketch. click Lines. and click OK. 22 On the Design Bar. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. and click . However. enter 14 mm for Depth. 26 On the Design Bar. Move the dimension values as shown. click Dimension.21 In the Work Plane dialog box. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. under Specify a new Work Plane. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 793 . notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. 23 On the Options Bar. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion.

select <Add parameter> for Label. select Family parameter. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. 794 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the dimension you added in the previous step. click Modify. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. enter Mullion Width for Name. 29 On the Design Bar. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. Under Group parameter under. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK. select Dimensions.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion.

■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. This is changed in later steps. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. Remember. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. and on the Options Bar. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. select Mullion Width for Label. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 795 . click Finish Sketch. 33 On the Design Bar. Select the dimension.

enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. Enter 1500 mm for Width.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. enter 1500 mm for Height. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. 796 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Click Apply. and click Apply. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other.

it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. click . Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. or undoing the same. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. click Lines. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. 37 In the Family Types dialog box. and aligned with the sash edge. click Set Work Plane. 42 On the Options Bar. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. and click OK. Click OK. enter 1000 mm for Height. In this case.NOTE After flexing the model. Click Apply. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. 41 On the Design Bar. evenly spaced. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 797 . select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. 39 On the Design Bar. Enter 2000 mm for Width. Under Other.

Do not be concerned with the dimension value. click Modify. click Dimension. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 48 On the Design Bar.44 On the Design Bar. Remember. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. as shown. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 798 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 49 On the Options Bar. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. select Mullion Width for Label. click Dimension. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. Move the dimension value as shown. 46 On the Design Bar.

click Join Geometry. select Mullion Width for Label. ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 799 . Select the dimension. and select the vertical mullions. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. click Finish Sketch. and on the Options Bar. The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. 53 Select the horizontal mullions.NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. 800 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 56 On the Design Bar. enter 1500 mm for Height. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. If necessary. Under Other. click Family Types. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area.54 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 57 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. you can still see the window. Click Apply. under 3D Views. Enter 1500 mm for Width. double-click View 1.

sash. Click Apply. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 801 . enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. you assign materials to the frame. enter 1000 mm for Height. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.58 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 2000 mm for Width. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 801. Click OK. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. Under Other. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise.

4 In the Materials dialog box. select Pine Frame for Name. and the mullions. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 9 Select the window frame sweep. clear the other view options. the sash. Medium. 10 On the Options Bar. under AccuRender. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 In the Materials dialog box. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. click for Material. 18 On the Design Bar. select Edit for Visibility. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. and click OK. 13 In the Materials dialog box. select Stained. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. click Duplicate. 2 In the Materials dialog box. click . 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. click OK. and select Shading with Edges. No Gloss. verify that Coarse. and click OK. and click OK. and click OK. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. click OK. under View Specific Display. under Elevations. Yellow/. click Materials. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. enter Pine Frame for Name. click Modify. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). click for Texture. Dark. click the Model Graphics Style control. and Fine are selected. sash. 3 In the New Material dialog box. 16 Under Detail Levels. under Identity Data. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. double-click Exterior. under Graphics. 8 On the View Control Bar. 802 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

double-click Right. Medium. and click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. 25 Zoom in on a window corner. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 803 . and Fine are selected.Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Visibility. 21 On the Options Bar. verify that Coarse. 20 Select the glass extrusion. under 3D Views. double-click View 1. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 23 Under Detail Levels. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). under View Specific Display.

mullions. and glass display their assigned materials. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. sash. 804 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .The window frame. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. “Defining New Window Types” on page 804.

enter 2000 mm for Height. The window height is doubled. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. and click Apply. 3 In the Family Types dialog box.Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. under Family Types. Enter 1250 mm for Height. enter 1000 mm for Height. Click Apply. In the Family Types dialog box. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 7 In the Name dialog box. and click Apply. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. 2 On the Design Bar. Defining New Window Types | 805 . and click OK. and click Apply. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window.

Training Window. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. 806 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Save. and click OK. Enter 1300 mm for Height. navigate to the location of your Training Window. 15 On the File menu. click New. 10 In the Name dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK.9 Under Family Types. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Enter 1500 mm for Height. click to start a new project based on your default template.rfa file. and click Open. Click Apply. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. 13 In the Name dialog box. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types.rfa. Click OK. click Load. click Window. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. 11 In the Family Types dialog box. 19 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. select it. 20 In the Open dialog box.

This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 34 On the View toolbar. click Thin Lines. click Modify. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. 32 On the View menu. Notice the detail that displays. 29 In the Type Selector. and select Shading with Edges. clear Tag on Placement. 24 On the Options Bar.Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 25 In the Type Selector. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. 33 Zoom in on the center window. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Window. 23 On the Design Bar. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 27 In the Type Selector. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 35 On the View Control Bar. Defining New Window Types | 807 . 31 On the Design Bar. click . 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. click Wall.

you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. drawer base. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. and specify values for the furniture length and depth.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. and drawers as extrusions. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. rolltop. 808 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Finally. You begin by creating the desktop.

5 On the View menu. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. Floor Plan: Ref. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. click Training Files. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. their exact location is not critical. 2 On the File menu. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. 4 Maximize the view. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Family. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 809 .rft. Level. they represent the furniture centerline axes. click Ref Plane.

810 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. click Dimension. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area.Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. as shown. and ending at the right reference plane.

Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 811 . click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. as shown. 13 Select the left reference plane. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal.12 On the Design Bar. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. and ending at the lower reference plane. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane.

18 On the Design Bar. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. 19 Select the upper. as shown. horizontal reference plane. click Modify.17 To the right of the dimension you just created. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. 812 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

.> for Label. Select Type. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown.21 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. enter Length for Name. TIP To do this. Afterwards. select <Add parameter.. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 813 . Click OK. click Modify. select Dimensions. For Group parameter under. Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension.

27 On the Options Bar. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. click Family Types.. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. 30 On the Design Bar. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. 814 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Depth for Name. Therefore.> for Label. For Group parameter under. Select Type.. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter. select Dimensions. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. you can still see the model.

“Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 815. enter 2000 mm for Length.31 In the Family Types dialog box. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click . 2 On the Options Bar. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. it will also adapt to the same changes. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Your lines may have a lighter weight. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. enter 3000 mm for Length. Click Apply. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 815 . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. NOTE In the image below. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click Symbolic Lines. Click Apply. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click OK.

click Set Work Plane. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. and click to select all four symbolic lines. under Specify a new Work Plane. and enter 100 mm for Depth. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines.4 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Level for Name. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. 11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 8 On the Options Bar. double-click Front. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. click . and select the top edge. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. 816 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Level: Ref. 10 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Finish Sketch. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. and click OK.

click Dimension. Under Parameter Data. enter Height for Name. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.> for Label. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. and select the bottom edge. click Modify. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. as shown.14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm.. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. select Family parameter.. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 817 . specify the following: ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter.

Select Type.> for Label. 29 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Modify. and click Apply. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. select Dimensions. click Family Types. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 818. 818 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. and click Apply. select Dimensions. and click Apply. enter Thickness for Name. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. For Group parameter under. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select Family parameter. 25 On the Options Bar.■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base.. Select Type. 27 On the Design Bar.. you can still see the model. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 750 mm for Height. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. Under Parameter Data. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1200 mm for Height. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click OK. enter 4000 mm for Length. Click OK. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click OK. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. select <Add parameter.

and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Design Bar. double-click Ref. click Ref Plane. click Dimension. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 819 . Level. 6 On the Design Bar. click . and enter 100 mm for Offset.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane.

and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. as shown. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. Level for Name. 10 On the Design Bar. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. select Level: Ref. Lock the dimension as shown. click Set Work Plane. 13 On the Options Bar. Click the lock icon as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 820 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. click . and click OK. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box.7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. under Specify a new Work Plane.

and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 16 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. two lock icons display. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 821 .After you complete the rectangle.

822 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. as shown below at the cursor. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 20 On the Tools toolbar. . 19 Select the four sketched lines. using the TAB key. 22 On the Tools toolbar. click the Mirror tool. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. You can also highlight the entire line chain. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top.Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. 23 For the align-to reference. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. click .

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 823 .24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 26 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. A lock icon displays.

31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter Drawer Base Width for Name.> for Label. 30 On the Options Bar. select Dimensions.. Under Parameter Data. as shown. 28 Add two final dimensions. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. select Family parameter. Select Type. Click OK.■ Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. For Group parameter under.. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. 824 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.

32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. select Drawer Base Width for Label. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 825 . 35 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. double-click Front. click Modify. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.

notice that annotations display in this view. 42 On the View menu. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view.37 On the Tools toolbar. click it to lock the alignment. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. 40 On the Design Bar. After the alignment. click Visibility/Graphics. click . and click OK. However. click Modify. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 826 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. a lock icon displays. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. 41 On the View toolbar. click . click the Scale control and select 1:20. 45 On the View Control Bar.

enter 4000 mm for Length. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 827. and click Apply. Click OK. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 827 . Click Apply. and click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. Enter 750 mm for Height. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop.Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 47 On the Design Bar. Enter 1200 mm for Height. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you can still see the model. enter 2000 mm for Length. and click Apply. Enter 100 mm for Thickness.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 On the Design Bar. under Elevations.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. double-click Right. and click to specify the upper left corner. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. click . click Set Work Plane. 828 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm.

then the lower horizontal sketch line. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 829 . and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. then select the right parallel sketch line.8 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the alignment. 9 Select the desk top. click .

and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu.11 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. click Finish Sketch. . TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. 830 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click the Fillet arc tool. and lock it. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. 14 On the Options Bar. and lock it. click Lines. click Dimension. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. the upper sketch line.

20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. 18 On the Tools toolbar. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. select the left edge of the rolltop. under Elevations. select the right edge of the rolltop. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. and click the lock icon.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. and click the lock icon. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 831 . click .

and click Apply. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. click . Enter 200 mm for Thickness. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you can still see the model.21 On the View toolbar. If not. The desk should adapt to all the changes. and click Apply. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. 23 On the Design Bar. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. You can also use dimension constraints. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Height. and click Apply. 832 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

3 In the Work Plane dialog box. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 833 . “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 833. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 750 mm for Height. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Pick a Plane. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. under Specify a new Work Plane. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. 2 On the Design Bar. Click OK. Click Apply. and click OK.25 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2000 mm for Length. click Set Work Plane. Enter 1000 mm for Depth.

5 In the Project Browser. click . select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. click Dimension. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. 6 On the Design Bar. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. 11 On the Tools toolbar. 14 On the Tools toolbar. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. . under Elevations. Lock each dimension as you add it. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. click Lines. There should be four dimensions as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. click . and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 834 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Front. 12 On the Options Bar. zoom the view until you do. click drawer set on the left. select Multiple Alignment.

31 On the View Control Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 On the Design Bar. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 835 . Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. and select Shading with Edges. 16 On the Design Bar. click . click . navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. 19 On the Design Bar. click 24 In the Materials dialog box. Polished. 26 In the Materials dialog box. click Modify. 29 In the Materials dialog box. click . and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. click the Model Graphics Style control. and click OK. 22 On the Options Bar.15 On the Tools toolbar. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. under Materials and Finishes. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box.Wood. 27 In the Material Library dialog box. click OK. click Extrusion Properties. 25 In the New Material dialog box. under Constraints. click OK. click for Texture. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. click Finish Sketch. Cherry. for Material. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. under AccuRender. enter Desk . click Duplicate. 20 On the View toolbar. 28 Click OK. Dark. and click OK.

If not. and click Apply. Click OK. you can still see the model. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 836. 33 On the Design Bar. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. You can also use dimension constraints.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. and click Apply. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. and click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Length. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 750 mm for Height. The desk should adapt to all the changes. enter 4000 mm for Length. Click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 836 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned.

3 In the Name dialog box. 15 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. 8 Under Family Types. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. click Apply. and click Apply. and click OK. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Load. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click New. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. click Component. 5 Under Family Types. 19 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Name dialog box. and click Open. 11 On the File menu. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. under Family Types. 17 On the Options Bar. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. 6 In the Name dialog box. click . click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. click Family Types. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. click 14 On the View toolbar. and click OK. Training Furniture. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. click Save. click New. to start a new project based on your default template. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family.rfa file. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. select it. 18 In the Open dialog box.rfa. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. click New. and click Apply. Defining New Furniture Types | 837 .

and click to add the third desk. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. 23 In the Type Selector.21 In the Type Selector. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. and add the second desk. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. 838 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson.

Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Select Metric Baluster. Drawing a Baluster | 839 . 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. 2 On the View menu. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.rft. 4 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. expand Floor Plans. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. However. click Lines. Level for Name. click New ➤ Family. 9 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the New dialog box. click Set Work Plane. and click Open. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. click Finish Sketch. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. select Ref. and click OK. Level. 7 On the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. and double-click Ref. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. their exact location is not critical.

12 On the Options Bar. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. click Finish Sketch. select Training Files. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. click the Modelling tab. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. click . In the New Project Dialog box. click New ➤ Project. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 6 On the Design Bar. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. The new custom baluster is now complete. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. By default.rfa. and click Open. double-click Front. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. click Modify and select the extrusion. click Stairs. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. 11 On the Design Bar. click OK.rte file. 840 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric. click Browse. 14 Click the lock icon.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 4 On the Design Bar.

and click Open. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. 11 On the View menu. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 9 On the View toolbar. click Modify and select the existing railing. click Shading with Edges. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click OK. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. under Baluster Family. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 10 On the View menu. click . click Edit for Baluster Placement. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box.7 On the File menu. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 841 . 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.rfa file. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. select it. click . 8 In the Open dialog box.

In the left pane of the New dialog box. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. you create five different profiles: a sweep. 842 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . a railing. their exact location is not critical. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings.rfa. a reveal. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. you draw a sweep profile. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. and a host sweep. soffits. Select Metric Profile. cornices. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. However. and click Open.Sweep. balusters. click Lines. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.rft. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. The new sweep profile is now complete. and other sweep-defined objects. a stair nosing. click New ➤ Family. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. you create a rail profile. select Training Files.

you create a stair nosing profile. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . verify that Ref. However. Select Metric Profile-Rail. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. In the left pane of the New dialog box. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. and click Open.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. select Training Files. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Level is open. click New ➤ Family. click Lines. The new rail profile is now complete. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. click New ➤ Family. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. Dataset ■ On the File menu.rfa.rft. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top.Rail. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. under Floor Plans. their exact location is not critical. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 843 .

verify that Ref. In addition. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Select Metric Profile-Reveal. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face.Stair Nosing. select Training Files. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . However. Level is open. click Lines. 844 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. click New ➤ Family. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.■ In the left pane of the New dialog box. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. and click Open. Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. under Floor Plans. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. and click Open. you create a reveal profile.rft. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. their exact location is not critical. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. select Training Files. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise.rft. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. In the left pane of the New dialog box.rfa. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.

rfa. click New ➤ Family. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . However. click Lines. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. their exact location is not critical.rft.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. and click Open. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Select Metric Profile-Hosted.Reveal. you create a host sweep profile. select Training Files. The new reveal profile is now complete. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. which may be any vertical surface. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. verify that Ref. Level is open. under Floor Plans. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 845 .

Select the DefaultMetric. click Create.rfa.rte file. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. select Training Files. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . click OK. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. click Lines. In the New Project Dialog box. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. click New ➤ Project. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.Host Sweep. and click Open.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. 846 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. 2 In the New Project dialog box. their exact location is not critical. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. However. The new host sweep profile is now complete. click Browse. Specify the family category 3 On the Modelling menu. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 10 On the Options Bar. and click Open. and double-click South.Sweep. select Profile . expand Views (all). click Sketch 2D Path.4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box.rfa.Sweep. click Finish Path. click Finish Sweep. and click OK. 12 In the Type Selector. select it. click . click Load Profiles. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. beside Load Profiles. 9 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Open dialog box. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. Sketch the 2D sweep path 6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Name dialog box. 17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. expand Elevations. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 847 . Modify the sweep profile configuration 16 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View toolbar. 8 On the Design Bar. the exact location of the path is not critical. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. enter Sweep for Name. 7 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. select Generic Models for Family Category. click Finish Family. and click OK. navigate to the location of Profile .

click Edit. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. select Profile Is Flipped. 2 In the New Project dialog box. on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. The sweep profile application is now complete. click . click Ref Plane. click OK. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. Under Other. 23 Click OK. click Browse. 24 On the Design Bar. In the New Project Dialog box. 20 Select the sweep profile and. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. select Training Files. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . Create a new project 1 On the File menu.18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. Under Constraints. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Family. and click Open. Select the DefaultMetric. 25 On the View toolbar.rte file. Draw a wall group 3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. click New ➤ Project. 21 Select the sweep profile again and. 848 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset.

click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View toolbar. their exact location is not critical. 7 On the Options Bar. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 849 . verify that Horizontal is selected. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. 4 Draw four walls as shown.NOTE When you draw the walls. click .

on the Options Bar. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. 17 On the View toolbar. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. floor and ceiling finish.Host Sweep for Profile. you specify the room tag parameters. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. In the left pane of the New dialog box.Host Sweep. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 11 On the File menu. navigate to the location of Profile . click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Open. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 In the Dynamic View dialog box. Select M_Room Tag. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. . 13 Select the wall sweep and. 850 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and area with labels added to extract project data. select Profile . under Construction.rft. and click Open. and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder.rfa. click Spin [Shift]. click OK. and click OK. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. select Training Files.10 On the Design Bar. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. click Modify. 12 In the Open dialog box. click . The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. select it.Host Sweep : Profile . you create a room tag which displays room name. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

select Floor Finish. select Underline. click Duplicate. 7 In the Type properties dialog box. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. click Label. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. select Ceiling Finish. clear Underline. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. and click OK. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click . 17 In the Type Selector. select Label : 2mm. select Name. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. click Edit/New. and click OK. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. 16 Zoom in on the label. select Area. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Name dialog box. click Label. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 In the Type Selector. click OK. and click OK. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog box. enter 2mm for Name. and click OK. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 On the Options Bar. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 851 . and click OK. click Edit/New. and click OK. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box.

The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines.rft. select Training Files. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. notice that there is only one view available. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.rfa. In the left pane of the New dialog box. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. click . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click Lines. Select Generic Annotation. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and click Open. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. The new room tag is now ready for use. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. 852 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 853 .5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 6 On the Options Bar. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. click .

select North Line. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise.10 On the Design Bar. enter North Line for Name. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. click Modify. click Modify. 16 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK. click Modify. 854 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the upper vertical line. in the North Line row. click Object Styles. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. select 3 for Line Weight.rfa. and click OK. under Modify Subcategories. 17 On the Design Bar. click New. Training North Arrow. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar.

click OK. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 8 In the Open dialog box. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. and labels.Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. graphics. select Training Files.rte file. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Creating a Titleblock Family | 855 . 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 7 On the File menu. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. 5 Click OK. select Training North Arrow. click Symbol. 2 In the New Project dialog box. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. click New ➤ Project. and click Open. Select the DefaultMetric. select it. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The titleblock has linework. select A1 metric. In the New Project Dialog box. 10 In the Type Selector. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. 12 On the Design Bar. text. Dataset ■ On the File menu. and your project data. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. click New ➤ Titleblock. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. and click Open. click Sheet. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol.rfa. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Browse. click Modify.

select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. and enter 140 for Offset. click . and click . 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. and click Open. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 856 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 On the Options Bar. .■ In the left pane of the New dialog box. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. click Lines. Select A0 metric. and click to draw a new vertical line. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown.rft. 7 On the Options Bar. click . and enter -25 for Offset.

24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. click Modify. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 857 . and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. click . 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. click Lines. and select the second and third horizontal lines. and enter 20 for Offset. 16 In the Type Selector. enter 30 for Offset. 17 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar.11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. select Wide Lines. 13 In the Type Selector. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. press CTRL. select Title Blocks. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 15 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar.

858 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Import/Link ➤ Image.25 On the Design Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. text notes. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. navigate to Training Files/Common. 4 Zoom in on the logo. and labels to your titleblock. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. select Company Logo.jpg. 2 In the Open dialog box. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. and click Open. The titleblock linework is now complete. you add a company logo. click Modify.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. select Text : 8mm. enter 10 for Text Size. 11 Click OK twice. and add an address and phone number as shown. and click OK. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 859 . under Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. and select Bold. click Text. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 9 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate.Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. in the text box. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. enter 10mm Bold for Name. click . Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector.

18 Select the drag handle. click Modify. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. address.Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. Add consultant name. and select the last text note. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. click Text. and select the consultant text note. 860 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and drag the text note down as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 861 .23 On the Edit toolbar. select Constrain and Multiple. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. click . 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location. 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. 24 On the Options Bar.

click Edit/New. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Sheet Number:. select Text : 5mm. and enter Drawn By:. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 32 In the Name dialog box. click Text. and click OK.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. under Text. enter 5 for Text Size. enter 5mm for Name. 862 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 34 Click OK twice. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. and enter Checked By:. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 29 On the Options Bar. and enter Date:.

Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. click Label. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 41 On the Options Bar. select Project Issue Date. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 863 . and click OK. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field.

58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. select Sheet Number. select Checked By and click OK. and click OK. 53 In the Name dialog box. under Text. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. select Drawn By. select Project Number. and click to specify the label location. select Label : 15mm Label. click . click Duplicate. and click OK. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click to specify the label location. 50 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Edit/New. click Label. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Center and Middle. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 59 On the Options Bar. enter 15 for Text Size. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. 864 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 55 Click OK twice. and click OK. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 15mm Label for Name. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box.

65 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click to specify the label location. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK. select Client Name. select Project Name. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location. click Label. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 865 . 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

click Modify. In the New Project Dialog box. enter 4 for Text Size. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog box.rfa file. select it. and click Open. select Training Files. click . 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. click Left and Middle. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.rte file. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. and click OK. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. 866 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and in the left pane of the New dialog box. and click Open. click Duplicate. select File Path. click Browse. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.70 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the label location. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 75 Click OK twice. enter 4mm Label. 7 Click OK. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. click Sheet.rfa. select 4mm Label. and click OK. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. click Load. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 73 In the Name dialog box. and labels are now complete. 5 In the Open dialog box. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. under Text. text. click New ➤ Project. 80 On the Design Bar. 77 On the Options Bar. click OK. The titleblock graphics. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select the DefaultMetric.

Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. Enter Office Building for Project Name. and click OK. 2005 for Project Issue Date. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 On the Settings menu. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. 14 Click OK. Enter In Progress for Project Status. click Modify and select the titleblock. 9 On the Options Bar. under Other. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 867 . click . enter Name for Drawn By. click Project Information.

click Project Units. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt. and click Open. select Training and navigate to the Common folder. click Orient ➤ Southeast. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. Select c_Pantheon. click Open. on the Settings menu. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. set the Area to Square meters. and set the suffix to None. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. To change the units of measurement to meters. Set the Length units to millimeters.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. 868 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

select Section: Wall Section . enter Dome for Name. click Set Work Plane. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. and double-click South. and click OK. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. click Create. expand Views (all). 10 In the Go To View dialog box. and click OK. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. expand Elevations.Next. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Open View. 7 On the Design Bar.Center. 5 In the Name dialog box. select Pick a Plane. and click OK. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 869 . you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. select Roofs for Family Category.

Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click . 12 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar. click . 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. click Axis. 870 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .The center wall section view is displayed.

and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 871 .17 Move the cursor out. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. click . and select Chain. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. 19 On the Options Bar. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown.

click Lines. 872 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 27 On the Options Bar. Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 23 On the Options Bar. click . 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. select Delete Inner Segment.

30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. 32 On the Options Bar. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 873 . and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. click . click and select Chain.

41 On the Design Bar. click . click Finish Sketch. 38 In the Materials dialog box. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. select Concrete .35 Select the interior face of the wall. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. click OK. under Materials and Finishes. 42 On the View toolbar. 40 On the Design Bar. click Create. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. The dome roof closed profile is now complete. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. click Finish Family. click for Material. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. click Revolution Properties. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. and click OK. 874 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 3 In the Name dialog box. select Floors for Family Category. 11 On the Options Bar. click Axis. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve.Center. and click OK. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 875 . and click Open View. select Pick a Plane. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click . 5 On the Design Bar. double-click South. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 6 On the Design Bar. select Section: Wall Section . enter Concave Floor for Name. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis.

click . 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. 876 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for the start point of the floor profile as shown. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. click Lines. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. 14 On the Options Bar. and select Chain. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.O.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. Footing level line and the axis.

select Cobblestone for Name. 25 On the Design Bar. click for Material. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click OK. click Finish Sketch.O.18 Specify the intersection of the T. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. double-click 3D Section View. 24 On the Design Bar. click Revolution Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 22 In the Materials dialog box. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile.O. click Finish Family. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 877 . The concave floor closed profile is now complete.

878 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. The truss also has multiple types. During this tutorial. At the end of this tutorial. 879 . methodology. you will understand the process. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit MEP 2008. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. In exercises that become increasingly complex. and detail level controls. assigned subcatecories.Parametric Component Design Techniques 18 In this tutorial. not specifically how to make a floor truss. formula-based parameters. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. In this case. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor.

and structural walls. and also works intuitively with them. Although this solution is possible. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. you determine the requirements of the new component. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 880 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . It should also be an available option within a beam system. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. In this case. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. Two types should be created. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. NOTE When creating a new family. In this case. Take this into consideration during your design planning. In this lesson. For every complexity added to a family. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. you should avoid over-designing the component. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. In addition. it is not the best solution. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. In the next exercise. For training purposes. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. this must be a structural beam component. a generic floor-based component might work. beams. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family.

“Selecting the Family Template” on page 881. In addition. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. In the previous exercise. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. Selecting the Family Template | 881 . the planning stage and questions may differ.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. such as wood type. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. 4 Continue with the next exercise. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. Depending on the family you are designing. would require Instance or Type parameters. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise.

Notice that most of the template names include the component type. this is where you access family templates. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. you will access them from the Training Files folder. 6 In the New dialog box. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. There are two structural framing templates provided.rft. scroll to the structural framing templates. ■ Metric Structural Framing . for example: wall based or floor based. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. Select it so that the preview displays. In addition. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).Beams and Braces. 4 Scroll through the various template options. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. However. click Training Files. On the right side of the New dialog box.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. and open Metric\Templates. notice the preview.rft 882 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You should be in the Metric Templates folder. Like most generic family templates. Usually.

Level Selecting the Family Template | 883 .rft to open it. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.rft and notice the preview.Complex and Trusses. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. spacing. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . 10 Maximize the view. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. This template is the best starting point for the new family. Floor Plan: Ref.rft. ■ Metric Structural Framing .Beams and Braces.Complex and Trusses. Because of its simplicity.Beams and Braces. Level. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . and notice the preview.This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. Floor Plan: Ref. and display functions required by structural beams.

Level. under Elevations. however. 11 In the Project Browser. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line.In this view. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. double-click Front. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. Reference Plane: Left. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 884. you add reference planes to the beam design. Like many templates. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. under 3D Views. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. under Floor Plans. lines. double-click Ref. double-click View 1. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. 12 In the Project Browser. you add the reference planes. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. 884 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Therefore.

The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 885 . ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. In the project plan view image below. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. In the image below. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. notice the location of the beam extents. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project.

you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. Before adding new reference planes. 886 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click . 5 On the Edit Toolbar. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). In a later exercise. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. click Ref Plane. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar.

13 On the Design Bar. and select the Level: Ref. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. Level. select the lower horizontal reference plane. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. 10 On the Design Bar. click . To do this. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. click Ref Plane. These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. Level. 14 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. click Ref Plane. Level as the mirror axis. click on the Edit toolbar. click to place it. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it.Add ref. double-click Front. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. Adding Reference Planes | 887 .

You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. Before you move on to the next exercise. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it.16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. click to place it as shown. 888 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. specify an Offset of 200 mm. 19 On the Options Bar. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. click to place it as shown.

Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. Level. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click Ref. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. 22 On the Options Bar. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. Adding Reference Planes | 889 . under Floor Plans. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. which you do in the next exercise. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. specify an Offset of 238 mm.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right).

This tool is the aligned dimension tool. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. After adding the dimension. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. Wood Floor Truss. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. 890 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 890. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. click .rfa. click Modify. 2 On the Options Bar.25 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. 27 In the Save As dialog box. Make sure you remember where you saved it. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. and click Save.

double-click Front. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. Place the dimension as shown. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 9 On the Design Bar. the Center reference plane. and the lower horizontal reference plane. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 891 . and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. click Dimension. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. click Dimension. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. place the dimension to the left as shown.

Level. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously.NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. and place it below the dimension you added previously. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 892 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.

add two dimensions as shown. In addition. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 894.Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. dimensions. and constraints as needed. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 893 . These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. you will add additional reference planes. Throughout the tutorial. In the next exercise. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. 15 Add four dimensions as shown. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. select Add parameter for Label. Select Type. double-click Ref. consider making it a type parameter. select Family parameter. 3 On the Options Bar. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. enter Chord Width for Name. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. In this exercise. When you design a new family. consider making it a type parameter. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown.rfa. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. under Floor Plans. consider making it an instance parameter. 894 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor.Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. If the component has material that varies per component. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. Wood Floor Truss. it becomes a parameter. Level. ■ Click OK. Under Parameter Data. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Creating New Length Parameters | 895 . 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK. under Elevations. Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. enter Depth for Name. 7 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Type. Select Type. Click OK. double-click Front. select Add parameter for Label. select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. Under Parameter Data.Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. select Family parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data. 10 On the Options Bar.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 13 On the Options Bar. enter Chord Thickness for Name. select Add parameter for Label. 896 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Select Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. select Chord Thickness for Label. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

18 On the Design Bar. Flexing the Component Model | 897 . Dimensions. This is not limited to length parameters. In the Family Types dialog box. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 On the File menu. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. “Flexing the Component Model” on page 897. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. 19 Click Cancel. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. When you load this family into a project. click Save. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. If you add a new material parameter. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. Adding or modifying a parameter. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected.17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. click Family Types.

you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. under Dimensions. When you open the Family Types dialog box. Wood Floor Truss. Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. 898 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . enter 600 mm for Depth. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Apply. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. click Family Types. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.rfa. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. 2 On the Design Bar. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. After you verify this. In this exercise. When you open the Family Types dialog. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. you can drag it to the opposing corner. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. Nesting a component. When you flex a family.■ ■ ■ Adding a new constraint. or ■ Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area.

Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Flexing the Component Model | 899 . Click OK. Click Apply. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. and click Apply. In addition. 800 mm for Center Chase Width.Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Level. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. 80 mm for Chord Thickness.

click . you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson.When working within the Family Editor. “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 900. and select Lock. double-click Left. click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. After flexing the design.rfa. you align and lock their position. select Reference Plane: Member Left. 3 On the Design Bar. 6 On the File menu. After creating the extrusions. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 900 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. After adding the chords. Wood Floor Truss. under Elevations. and click OK. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. 6 On the Options Bar. click Name. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise.

click . When using the Trim tool. 11 On the Options Bar. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. Creating Solid Extrusions | 901 . NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines.Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. and verify that Lock is selected. click . 10 On the Design Bar. the lines will no longer overlap. 13 On the Tools toolbar. click the part of the line you want to keep. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. click . You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bott